FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.pdf
5,154 views
107 slides
Jun 20, 2024
Slide 1 of 107
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
About This Presentation
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
Slide Content
0
Fundamentals of
For Diploma & Bachelor Engineers
MECHANICAL
ENGINEERING
Mr. SAID AL-JABRI
2017
Fundamentals of
For Diploma & Bachelor Engineers
MECHANICAL
ENGINEERING
Mr. SAID AL-JABRI
2017
I
CONTENTS
CONTENTS .................................................................................................................. I
CHAPTER 1 ............................................................................................................. 1
1. ENGINEERING MATERIAL S ....................................................................................... 1
1.1 CLASSIFICATION OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS ...................................................... 2
1.2 PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS ................................................................................... 6
1.3 STRUCTURE OF MATERIA LS ................................................................................... 9
CHAPTER 2 ............................................................................................................. 10
2. FLUID POWER........................................................................................................... 10
2.1 FLUIDS MECHANICS AND FLUID PROPERTIES .......................................................... 11
2.2 PRESSURE AND ITS MEASUREMENT ........................................................................ 12
2.3 LAMINAR AND TURBULEN T FLOW .......................................................................... 13
2.4 FLUID FLOW ANALYSIS .......................................................................................... 13
2.5 CONTINUITY AND BERNO ULLI'S EQUATION ............................................................ 14
2.6 FLUID LOSSES IN PIPES ........................................................................................... 15
2.7 FLUID POWER SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 15
2.8 HYDRAULIC PUMPS & GAS COMPRESSORS ............................................................. 16
2.9 HYDRAULIC & PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS ................................................................ 18
2.10 HYDRAULIC & PNEUMATIC VALVES ..................................................................... 19
2.11 SEALS .................................................................................................................. 21
2.12 FILTERS ............................................................................................................... 21
2.13 ACCUMULATORS & RESERVOIR ........................................................................... 21
2.14 HYDRAULIC FLUIDS ............................................................................................. 23
2.15 TURBINES ............................................................................................................ 23
2.16 TUBE AND PIPE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 24
CHAPTER 3 ............................................................................................................. 27
3. HEAT TRANSFER ...................................................................................................... 27
3.1 CONCEPT OF HEAT ................................................................................................. 28
3.2 HEAT TRANSFER .................................................................................................... 31
CHAPTER 4 ............................................................................................................. 33
4. MECHANICS OF MACHINE ......................................................................................... 33
4.1 NEWTON'S LAW – KINEMATICS - KINETICS ............................................................. 34
4.2 CONCEPTS OF MECHANIS MS ................................................................................... 36
4.3 COMPUTER SIMULATION OF MECHANISMS ............................................................ 38
4.4 BALANCING OF ROTAT ING AND RECIPROCATING MASSES ...................................... 38
4.5 CAMS AND FOLLOWERS ......................................................................................... 38
4.6 GEARS DRIVES ...................................................................................................... 40
CONTENTS
CONTENTS .................................................................................................................. I
CHAPTER 1 ............................................................................................................. 1
1. ENGINEERING MATERIAL S ....................................................................................... 1
1.1 CLASSIFICATION OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS ...................................................... 2
1.2 PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS ................................................................................... 6
1.3 STRUCTURE OF MATERIA LS ................................................................................... 9
CHAPTER 2 ............................................................................................................. 10
2. FLUID POWER........................................................................................................... 10
2.1 FLUIDS MECHANICS AND FLUID PROPERTIES .......................................................... 11
2.2 PRESSURE AND ITS MEASUREMENT ........................................................................ 12
2.3 LAMINAR AND TURBULEN T FLOW .......................................................................... 13
2.4 FLUID FLOW ANALYSIS .......................................................................................... 13
2.5 CONTINUITY AND BERNO ULLI'S EQUATION ............................................................ 14
2.6 FLUID LOSSES IN PIPES ........................................................................................... 15
2.7 FLUID POWER SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 15
2.8 HYDRAULIC PUMPS & GAS COMPRESSORS ............................................................. 16
2.9 HYDRAULIC & PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS ................................................................ 18
2.10 HYDRAULIC & PNEUMATIC VALVES ..................................................................... 19
2.11 SEALS .................................................................................................................. 21
2.12 FILTERS ............................................................................................................... 21
2.13 ACCUMULATORS & RESERVOIR ........................................................................... 21
2.14 HYDRAULIC FLUIDS ............................................................................................. 23
2.15 TURBINES ............................................................................................................ 23
2.16 TUBE AND PIPE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 24
CHAPTER 3 ............................................................................................................. 27
3. HEAT TRANSFER ...................................................................................................... 27
3.1 CONCEPT OF HEAT ................................................................................................. 28
3.2 HEAT TRANSFER .................................................................................................... 31
CHAPTER 4 ............................................................................................................. 33
4. MECHANICS OF MACHINE ......................................................................................... 33
4.1 NEWTON'S LAW – KINEMATICS - KINETICS ............................................................. 34
4.2 CONCEPTS OF MECHANIS MS ................................................................................... 36
4.3 COMPUTER SIMULATION OF MECHANISMS ............................................................ 38
4.4 BALANCING OF ROTAT ING AND RECIPROCATING MASSES ...................................... 38
4.5 CAMS AND FOLLOWERS ......................................................................................... 38
4.6 GEARS DRIVES ...................................................................................................... 40
II
4.7 BELT DRIVES ......................................................................................................... 42
4.8 WIRE ROPES .......................................................................................................... 44
4.9 BREAKS ................................................................................................................ 45
4.10 CLUTCHES ........................................................................................................... 46
CHAPTER 5 ............................................................................................................. 48
5. THERMODYNAMICS ................................................................................................. 45
5.1 THERMODYNAMICS 1 ............................................................................................. 49
5.2 THERMODYNAMICS 2 ............................................................................................. 50
CHAPTER 6 ............................................................................................................. 70
6. PHYSICS ................................................................................................................... 70
6.1 MAGNETISM ........................................................................................................... 71
6.2 WAVES .................................................................................................................. 73
6.3 REFLECTION AND REFRA CTION OF LIGHT ............................................................... 75
6.4 AC CIRCUITS .......................................................................................................... 77
6.5 KINETIC THEORY OF GASES .................................................................................... 80
6.6 MODERN PHYSICS .................................................................................................. 82
CHAPTER 7 ............................................................................................................. 84
7. CHEMISTRY ............................................................................................................. 84
7.1 CHEMICAL FORMULAE AN D EQUATIONS ................................................................ 85
CHAPTER 8 ............................................................................................................. 94
8. MATHEMATICS......................................................................................................... 94
8.1 FORMULAS ............................................................................................................ 95
4.7 BELT DRIVES ......................................................................................................... 42
4.8 WIRE ROPES .......................................................................................................... 44
4.9 BREAKS ................................................................................................................ 45
4.10 CLUTCHES ........................................................................................................... 46
CHAPTER 5 ............................................................................................................. 48
5. THERMODYNAMICS ................................................................................................. 45
5.1 THERMODYNAMICS 1 ............................................................................................. 49
5.2 THERMODYNAMICS 2 ............................................................................................. 50
CHAPTER 6 ............................................................................................................. 70
6. PHYSICS ................................................................................................................... 70
6.1 MAGNETISM ........................................................................................................... 71
6.2 WAVES .................................................................................................................. 73
6.3 REFLECTION AND REFRA CTION OF LIGHT ............................................................... 75
6.4 AC CIRCUITS .......................................................................................................... 77
6.5 KINETIC THEORY OF GASES .................................................................................... 80
6.6 MODERN PHYSICS .................................................................................................. 82
CHAPTER 7 ............................................................................................................. 84
7. CHEMISTRY ............................................................................................................. 84
7.1 CHEMICAL FORMULAE AN D EQUATIONS ................................................................ 85
CHAPTER 8 ............................................................................................................. 94
8. MATHEMATICS......................................................................................................... 94
8.1 FORMULAS ............................................................................................................ 95
1
2
1.1 Classification of Engineering Materials:
1. Metals
2. Polymers
3. Ceramics
4. Composites
5. Semiconductors
Properties of metals:
1. They have shiny surface
2. They are good conductor of heat and electricity
3. They are strong material
4. They are ductile- they can easily made into wire
5. They are malleable- they can easily made into different sheet
6. They are formable- they can easily made into different shapes
7. They have high melting points
8. They are heavy
Metals: Types of metals are Pure metals & alloys
1. Pure metals:
Metals in clear form or unmixed form.
They are better conductor of electricity and heat than alloys.
They are more ductile, malleable and formable than alloys.
They are soft than alloys.
Examples of pure metals are Copper, Aluminum, Tin and Tungsten.
a) Copper is used to make automobile radiator sheets, bottoms of cooking,
pipes of heat exchangers, electrical wire cable and motor winding.
Because it is good thermal conductivity,good electrical conductivity,
ductile, malleable, low cost, more availability and easy for manufacturing.
b) Aluminum is used to make soft drink cons, windows frame, food storage
foils. Because it is corrosion resistance, malleable, low cost, more
availability and easy for manufacturing.
c) Tin is used to cover the surface of materials, because it is corrosion
resistance.
d) Tungsten is used for filament in bulbs, because of its high melting point,
corrosion resistance.
2. Alloys:
Alloys are mixture of two or more metals.
They are stronger and harder than pure metals.
Examples of alloys are Steel, Stainless Steel, High Speed steel (HSS), Brass, Cost
Iron, Duralumin and Bell metal.
1) Steel is made by mixing Iron and Carbon. Types of steel:
i. Low carbon steels
If the percentage of carbon in steels are between 0.05-0.15%
They are used for structure bars, automobiles bodies, and
furniture.
They have good strength, ductile, malleable, formable and
easy for welding process.
1.1 Classification of Engineering Materials:
1. Metals
2. Polymers
3. Ceramics
4. Composites
5. Semiconductors
Properties of metals:
1. They have shiny surface
2. They are good conductor of heat and electricity
3. They are strong material
4. They are ductile- they can easily made into wire
5. They are malleable- they can easily made into different sheet
6. They are formable- they can easily made into different shapes
7. They have high melting points
8. They are heavy
Metals: Types of metals are Pure metals & alloys
1. Pure metals:
Metals in clear form or unmixed form.
They are better conductor of electricity and heat than alloys.
They are more ductile, malleable and formable than alloys.
They are soft than alloys.
Examples of pure metals are Copper, Aluminum, Tin and Tungsten.
a) Copper is used to make automobile radiator sheets, bottoms of cooking,
pipes of heat exchangers, electrical wire cable and motor winding.
Because it is good thermal conductivity,good electrical conductivity,
ductile, malleable, low cost, more availability and easy for manufacturing.
b) Aluminum is used to make soft drink cons, windows frame, food storage
foils. Because it is corrosion resistance, malleable, low cost, more
availability and easy for manufacturing.
c) Tin is used to cover the surface of materials, because it is corrosion
resistance.
d) Tungsten is used for filament in bulbs, because of its high melting point,
corrosion resistance.
2. Alloys:
Alloys are mixture of two or more metals.
They are stronger and harder than pure metals.
Examples of alloys are Steel, Stainless Steel, High Speed steel (HSS), Brass, Cost
Iron, Duralumin and Bell metal.
1) Steel is made by mixing Iron and Carbon. Types of steel:
i. Low carbon steels
If the percentage of carbon in steels are between 0.05-0.15%
They are used for structure bars, automobiles bodies, and
furniture.
They have good strength, ductile, malleable, formable and
easy for welding process.
3
ii. Mid steels
If the percentage of carbon in steels are between 0.16-0.29%
Used and properties same to Low carbon steel.
iii. Medium carbon steels
If the percentage of carbon in steels are between 0.3-0.59%
They are used to make Shaft, Bolts and Nots. Because they
are more strength compared to low carbon and mid steel.
iv. High carbon steel
If the percentage of carbon in steels are between 0.6-0.99%
They are used to make springs and ropes. Because they have
more strength compared with low carbon steels, mild steel
and high carbon steels.
v. Ultra-high carbon steels
If the percentage of carbon in steels are between 1-2%
They are used to make automobiles axles, workshop
punches, workshop scribers, workshop dividers. Because they
are very strong and hard compared to all other carbon steels.
2) Stainless steel is made by mixing Iron, Carbon, Chromium and Manganese
It is used to make Vernier caliper, workshop ruler, bearing of
machines, spoons, knives, plates, cups, surgical equipment.
They are good strength, corrosion resistance, shiny surface,
ductile, malleable, and formable.
3) High Speed steel (HSS) is an alloy of Iron, Carbon, tungsten, Chromium
and vanadium.
It is used to make cutting tools of various machines and
workshop files.
It has high hardness, high strength, high toughness, easy for
re-sharping and low cost.
4) Brass is made by mixing Copper and Zinc.
It is used to make heat exchanger pipes and ship parts.
It is stronger than Copper, good conductor of heat, malleable,
low cost and corrosion resistance.
5) Cost Iron is made by mixing Iron, more than 2% of Carbon, silicon and
Manganese.
It is used to make machine tool bases.
It is easy for casting, easy for cutting, medium hardness,
absorb vibration and low cost.
6) Duralumin is an alloy of Aluminum, Copper, Magnesium and Manganese.
It is used for making aircraft body, light truck wheels, light
rivets.
Because it has high strength, light weight, easy for shaping.
7) Bell metal is an alloy of Bronze, Copper and tin.
ii. Mid steels
If the percentage of carbon in steels are between 0.16-0.29%
Used and properties same to Low carbon steel.
iii. Medium carbon steels
If the percentage of carbon in steels are between 0.3-0.59%
They are used to make Shaft, Bolts and Nots. Because they
are more strength compared to low carbon and mid steel.
iv. High carbon steel
If the percentage of carbon in steels are between 0.6-0.99%
They are used to make springs and ropes. Because they have
more strength compared with low carbon steels, mild steel
and high carbon steels.
v. Ultra-high carbon steels
If the percentage of carbon in steels are between 1-2%
They are used to make automobiles axles, workshop
punches, workshop scribers, workshop dividers. Because they
are very strong and hard compared to all other carbon steels.
2) Stainless steel is made by mixing Iron, Carbon, Chromium and Manganese
It is used to make Vernier caliper, workshop ruler, bearing of
machines, spoons, knives, plates, cups, surgical equipment.
They are good strength, corrosion resistance, shiny surface,
ductile, malleable, and formable.
3) High Speed steel (HSS) is an alloy of Iron, Carbon, tungsten, Chromium
and vanadium.
It is used to make cutting tools of various machines and
workshop files.
It has high hardness, high strength, high toughness, easy for
re-sharping and low cost.
4) Brass is made by mixing Copper and Zinc.
It is used to make heat exchanger pipes and ship parts.
It is stronger than Copper, good conductor of heat, malleable,
low cost and corrosion resistance.
5) Cost Iron is made by mixing Iron, more than 2% of Carbon, silicon and
Manganese.
It is used to make machine tool bases.
It is easy for casting, easy for cutting, medium hardness,
absorb vibration and low cost.
6) Duralumin is an alloy of Aluminum, Copper, Magnesium and Manganese.
It is used for making aircraft body, light truck wheels, light
rivets.
Because it has high strength, light weight, easy for shaping.
7) Bell metal is an alloy of Bronze, Copper and tin.
4
It is used for making of Cannons, because it is easy for
casting, good strength, toughness and hardness and easy for
machining.
Polymers (Plastics): They are compounds of carbon molecules joined together in long chains.
a) Properties of polymers:
1. They are insulator of heat and electricity
2. They have moderate strength
3. They are corrosion resistance
4. They are light in weight
5. They are they are ductile and malleable
6. They have low melting point
b) Types of polymers:
1. Thermoplastics
2. Thermosetting plastic
3. Elastomers
i. Thermoplastics
Poly-ethylene (PE), Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) and Nylon are
the examples of thermoplastics.
They are used for making of bags(PE), water pipes(PVC),
electric cable insulators(PE), bottles(PE) and low strength
gear for toys(Nylon)
Because they are soft, flexible, easy for manufacturing, light
weight, they can be recycled and low cost.
ii. Thermosetting plastic
Bakelite is an example for thermosetting plastic.
It is used for making of TV covers, phone covers, handles of
cookers and knobs
Because it has more strength and hardness compared to
thermoplastics.
iii. Elastomers
These plastics are highly elastic in nature.
Rubber is an example of elastomer; it is used for making of
automobile tires.
Because it is highly elastic and absorbs vibrations.
Ceramics: are metallic and non-metallic oxides, carbides or nitrides.
a) Examples of Ceramics:
1. Aluminum Oxide (Alumina)
2. Silicon Nitride
3. Tungsten Carbide
4. Glass
5. Cement
6. and Sand
It is used for making of Cannons, because it is easy for
casting, good strength, toughness and hardness and easy for
machining.
Polymers (Plastics): They are compounds of carbon molecules joined together in long chains.
a) Properties of polymers:
1. They are insulator of heat and electricity
2. They have moderate strength
3. They are corrosion resistance
4. They are light in weight
5. They are they are ductile and malleable
6. They have low melting point
b) Types of polymers:
1. Thermoplastics
2. Thermosetting plastic
3. Elastomers
i. Thermoplastics
Poly-ethylene (PE), Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) and Nylon are
the examples of thermoplastics.
They are used for making of bags(PE), water pipes(PVC),
electric cable insulators(PE), bottles(PE) and low strength
gear for toys(Nylon)
Because they are soft, flexible, easy for manufacturing, light
weight, they can be recycled and low cost.
ii. Thermosetting plastic
Bakelite is an example for thermosetting plastic.
It is used for making of TV covers, phone covers, handles of
cookers and knobs
Because it has more strength and hardness compared to
thermoplastics.
iii. Elastomers
These plastics are highly elastic in nature.
Rubber is an example of elastomer; it is used for making of
automobile tires.
Because it is highly elastic and absorbs vibrations.
Ceramics: are metallic and non-metallic oxides, carbides or nitrides.
a) Examples of Ceramics:
1. Aluminum Oxide (Alumina)
2. Silicon Nitride
3. Tungsten Carbide
4. Glass
5. Cement
6. and Sand
5
i. Alumina, Silicon Nitride are used for making of grinding machine
wheels and grinding machine belt. Because they are very hard, heat
resistant and can cut easily other engineering materials.
ii. Tungsten Carbide is used for making of cutting tools of machines like
lathe, milling machine etc. Because it is very hard, heat resistant and
can cut easily other engineering materials.
b) Properties of Ceramics:
1. They are very hard compared to other engineering materials.
2. They are brittle materials.
3. They are heat resistant materials (refractory materials).
4. They have high melting point.
5. They are corrosion resistant.
6. They are insulators of heat and electricity.
Composite Materials: are made by mixing metal and non-metal or by mixing two different non-metals.
a) Different phases of composite materials:
1. Major phase called Matrix
2. And Minor phase called Reinforcement.
b) Examples of composite materials:
1. FBR (Fiber reinforced Plastic)
2. RCC (Reinforced Concrete Cement)
3. C/C composite material (Carbon Fiber Reinforced Carbon).
i. FBR (Fiber reinforced Plastic) is used for making safety helmets,
sports car parts, wind turbines and light weight boats.
ii. RCC (Reinforced Concrete Cement) is made by mixing Steel and
Concrete. It is used for construction of buildings and structures.
iii. C/C composite material (Carbon Fiber Reinforced Carbon) is made
by mixing graphite and carbon fiber. It is used for brake discs of
formula one car. Because it is hard and have good frictional
properties.
Semiconductors: They are materials with partial electrical conductivity. They are used for making of
Electronics Boards, Diodes, Capacitors and transformers.
a) Examples of semiconductors
1. Silicon
2. Germanium
b) Properties of semiconductors:
1. they are partial conductors of electricity and heat
2. they are brittle
3. they have low strength
i. Alumina, Silicon Nitride are used for making of grinding machine
wheels and grinding machine belt. Because they are very hard, heat
resistant and can cut easily other engineering materials.
ii. Tungsten Carbide is used for making of cutting tools of machines like
lathe, milling machine etc. Because it is very hard, heat resistant and
can cut easily other engineering materials.
b) Properties of Ceramics:
1. They are very hard compared to other engineering materials.
2. They are brittle materials.
3. They are heat resistant materials (refractory materials).
4. They have high melting point.
5. They are corrosion resistant.
6. They are insulators of heat and electricity.
Composite Materials: are made by mixing metal and non-metal or by mixing two different non-metals.
a) Different phases of composite materials:
1. Major phase called Matrix
2. And Minor phase called Reinforcement.
b) Examples of composite materials:
1. FBR (Fiber reinforced Plastic)
2. RCC (Reinforced Concrete Cement)
3. C/C composite material (Carbon Fiber Reinforced Carbon).
i. FBR (Fiber reinforced Plastic) is used for making safety helmets,
sports car parts, wind turbines and light weight boats.
ii. RCC (Reinforced Concrete Cement) is made by mixing Steel and
Concrete. It is used for construction of buildings and structures.
iii. C/C composite material (Carbon Fiber Reinforced Carbon) is made
by mixing graphite and carbon fiber. It is used for brake discs of
formula one car. Because it is hard and have good frictional
properties.
Semiconductors: They are materials with partial electrical conductivity. They are used for making of
Electronics Boards, Diodes, Capacitors and transformers.
a) Examples of semiconductors
1. Silicon
2. Germanium
b) Properties of semiconductors:
1. they are partial conductors of electricity and heat
2. they are brittle
3. they have low strength
6
1.2 Properties of Materials
2. Mechanical Properties
3. Electrical Properties
4. Chemical Properties
5. Thermal Properties
6. Physical Properties
Mechanical Properties Behavior of a material under action of force.
1. Strength
2. Elastic limit
3. Modulus of elasticity
4. Ductility / Brittleness
5. Toughness
6. Hardness
a) Stress- Strain:
i. Stress:
It is the ratio of force and area.
Stress = Force/Area, SI Unit N/m
2
or Pa
ii. Strain:
It is the ratio of change in length (Extension) to the original length.
Strain = Lf – Lo / Lo, No unit
Percentage Elongation = Strain * 100
iii. Hooke's Law: stress is directly proportional to strain.
stress-strain curve
A. Elastic Limit: the limit that when force is removed, material comes
back to its original shape.
B. Upper yield point: the point at which yielding observed at higher
stress value.
C. Lower yield point: the point at which yielding observed at lowest
stress value.
D. Ultimate tensile strength: the maximum stress that material can
withstand before it breaks.
E. Breaking or Fracture point: the point at which material breaks.
b) Modulus of elasticity (Young's Modulus):
It is the ratio of stress and strain.
Modulus of elasticity (E) = Stress/Strain
If a material has more modulus of elasticity, it has more stiffness.
1.2 Properties of Materials
2. Mechanical Properties
3. Electrical Properties
4. Chemical Properties
5. Thermal Properties
6. Physical Properties
Mechanical Properties Behavior of a material under action of force.
1. Strength
2. Elastic limit
3. Modulus of elasticity
4. Ductility / Brittleness
5. Toughness
6. Hardness
a) Stress- Strain:
i. Stress:
It is the ratio of force and area.
Stress = Force/Area, SI Unit N/m
2
or Pa
ii. Strain:
It is the ratio of change in length (Extension) to the original length.
Strain = Lf – Lo / Lo, No unit
Percentage Elongation = Strain * 100
iii. Hooke's Law: stress is directly proportional to strain.
stress-strain curve
A. Elastic Limit: the limit that when force is removed, material comes
back to its original shape.
B. Upper yield point: the point at which yielding observed at higher
stress value.
C. Lower yield point: the point at which yielding observed at lowest
stress value.
D. Ultimate tensile strength: the maximum stress that material can
withstand before it breaks.
E. Breaking or Fracture point: the point at which material breaks.
b) Modulus of elasticity (Young's Modulus):
It is the ratio of stress and strain.
Modulus of elasticity (E) = Stress/Strain
If a material has more modulus of elasticity, it has more stiffness.
7
c) Ductility:
When a material deforms more before fracture.
It is very important property for making of wire.
Pure metals like Gold, Silver, Copper and Aluminum are examples of ductile
materials.
d) Brittleness:
When a material deforms less before fracture.
Brittle materials fail suddenly without warning.
Ceramics like Glass, Alumina and Silica are examples of brittle materials.
Stress-Strain Curves for Ductile and Brittle Materials
e) Toughness:
Ability of a material to absorb energy before fracture.
Ductile materials have more toughness than brittle materials.
Toughness is measured in Joule.
Toughness is measured using Charpy and Izod Testing Machine.
Charpy and Izod Testing Machine
f) Hardness:
It is the resistance to indentation.
It is measured by force applied divided surface area of indentation (N/m
2
)
Machines used for testing hardness are Brinell hardness tester, Vickers
hardness Tester and Rockwell Hardness Tester.
Hardest natural material is Diamond.
Hardness Testing
c) Ductility:
When a material deforms more before fracture.
It is very important property for making of wire.
Pure metals like Gold, Silver, Copper and Aluminum are examples of ductile
materials.
d) Brittleness:
When a material deforms less before fracture.
Brittle materials fail suddenly without warning.
Ceramics like Glass, Alumina and Silica are examples of brittle materials.
Stress-Strain Curves for Ductile and Brittle Materials
e) Toughness:
Ability of a material to absorb energy before fracture.
Ductile materials have more toughness than brittle materials.
Toughness is measured in Joule.
Toughness is measured using Charpy and Izod Testing Machine.
Charpy and Izod Testing Machine
f) Hardness:
It is the resistance to indentation.
It is measured by force applied divided surface area of indentation (N/m
2
)
Machines used for testing hardness are Brinell hardness tester, Vickers
hardness Tester and Rockwell Hardness Tester.
Hardest natural material is Diamond.
Hardness Testing
8
Electrical Properties: Behavior of a material under action of force. It is useful for making electrical
products like wire, Motor etc.
1. Electrical Conductivity
2. Electrical Resistively
3. Dielectric Strength
a) Electrical Conductivity:
It is ability of a material to pass electrical current.
Conductivity: Silver > Copper > Aluminum
b) Electrical Resistively:
It is ability of a material to resist the flow of electrical current.
High electrical resistivity materials are used as Insulator.
Resistivity: Polymers = Ceramics > Metals
c) Dielectric Strength:
It is ability of a material to withstand high voltage without breaking.
Dielectric Strength: Polymers > Ceramics > Metals
Chemical Properties: Behavior of a material under Chemical Reactions.
1. Important Chemical Properties is Corrosion.
2. Corrosion is Oxidation of materials by react with Oxygen.
3. Methods used to stop corrosion are Painting, Cleaning, electro-plating, galvanization,
cathodic protection and chloride extraction.
4. Corrosion Resistance: Ceramics = Polymers > Metals
Thermal Properties: Behavior of a material under the action of heat.
1. Co-efficient of linear expansion
2. Specific heat
a) Co-efficient of linear expansion:
Materials expand when temperature increases.
High Co-efficient means, material expands more with small temperature.
Co-efficient of linear expansion: Polymers > Metals > Ceramics
b) Specific heat:
The amount of heat energy required to rise the temperature of 1 Kg of
substance by 1
0
.
Specific heat (C) =
Heat Energy
Mass × Change in Temperature
, SI units- J/Kg.K
High specific heat means, more heat energy required to rise its temperature.
Specific heat: Polymers = Ceramics > Metals
Physical Properties: Behavior of a material under changing the composition.
1. Density
2. Specific Strength
a) Density:
It is the ratio of Mass and Volume.
P = m/V , SI unit Kg/m
3
High density materials are heavier compared to low density materials.
b) Specific Strength:
It is the ratio of strength and density. SI unit Pa/Kg.m
-3
Electrical Properties: Behavior of a material under action of force. It is useful for making electrical
products like wire, Motor etc.
1. Electrical Conductivity
2. Electrical Resistively
3. Dielectric Strength
a) Electrical Conductivity:
It is ability of a material to pass electrical current.
Conductivity: Silver > Copper > Aluminum
b) Electrical Resistively:
It is ability of a material to resist the flow of electrical current.
High electrical resistivity materials are used as Insulator.
Resistivity: Polymers = Ceramics > Metals
c) Dielectric Strength:
It is ability of a material to withstand high voltage without breaking.
Dielectric Strength: Polymers > Ceramics > Metals
Chemical Properties: Behavior of a material under Chemical Reactions.
1. Important Chemical Properties is Corrosion.
2. Corrosion is Oxidation of materials by react with Oxygen.
3. Methods used to stop corrosion are Painting, Cleaning, electro-plating, galvanization,
cathodic protection and chloride extraction.
4. Corrosion Resistance: Ceramics = Polymers > Metals
Thermal Properties: Behavior of a material under the action of heat.
1. Co-efficient of linear expansion
2. Specific heat
a) Co-efficient of linear expansion:
Materials expand when temperature increases.
High Co-efficient means, material expands more with small temperature.
Co-efficient of linear expansion: Polymers > Metals > Ceramics
b) Specific heat:
The amount of heat energy required to rise the temperature of 1 Kg of
substance by 1
0
.
Specific heat (C) =
Heat Energy
Mass × Change in Temperature
, SI units- J/Kg.K
High specific heat means, more heat energy required to rise its temperature.
Specific heat: Polymers = Ceramics > Metals
Physical Properties: Behavior of a material under changing the composition.
1. Density
2. Specific Strength
a) Density:
It is the ratio of Mass and Volume.
P = m/V , SI unit Kg/m
3
High density materials are heavier compared to low density materials.
b) Specific Strength:
It is the ratio of strength and density. SI unit Pa/Kg.m
-3
9
1.3 Structure of Materials
Structure means arrangement. Structure of materials is arrangement of atoms in materials.
Classification of engineering materials based on structure:
1. Crystalline Materials: If the atoms arrangement in material is regular order.
Examples of Crystalline Materials are Pure Metals, Alloys, some Ceramics and
Semiconductors.
2. Partially Crystalline Materials: If the atoms arrangement in material is regular order and
irregular in other areas. Example: Polymers
3. Non-Crystalline (Amorphous) Materials: If the atoms arrangement in material is irregular
order.
Ex: Wood, Composite materials and some Ceramics.
Different between the properties of Amorphous and Crystalline Materials:
Amorphous Materials Crystalline Materials
1. They have low strength
2. They are light in light
3. They are brittle
4. They are insulator of heat and
electricity
1. They have high strength
2. They are heavy
3. They are ductile
4. They are conductor of heat and
electricity
1.3 Structure of Materials
Structure means arrangement. Structure of materials is arrangement of atoms in materials.
Classification of engineering materials based on structure:
1. Crystalline Materials: If the atoms arrangement in material is regular order.
Examples of Crystalline Materials are Pure Metals, Alloys, some Ceramics and
Semiconductors.
2. Partially Crystalline Materials: If the atoms arrangement in material is regular order and
irregular in other areas. Example: Polymers
3. Non-Crystalline (Amorphous) Materials: If the atoms arrangement in material is irregular
order.
Ex: Wood, Composite materials and some Ceramics.
Different between the properties of Amorphous and Crystalline Materials:
Amorphous Materials Crystalline Materials
1. They have low strength
2. They are light in light
3. They are brittle
4. They are insulator of heat and
electricity
1. They have high strength
2. They are heavy
3. They are ductile
4. They are conductor of heat and
electricity
10
11
2.1 Fluids Mechanics and Fluid Properties
Fluid mechanics is the branch of engineering which deals with behavior of fluid at rest & motion
There are three states of matter: Solid, Liquid and Gas. Liquid and gas are both fluids.
Difference between Liquids & Gasses
Liquids Gasses
It is difficult to compress & incompressible.
It has fixed volume.
It is easily to compress
It has no fixed volume; its volume changes with pressure.
Properties of Fluids:
1. Density:
It is the mass per unit volume.
Ρ=
�
�
��/�
3
ρ
����� = 1000 �/�
3
, ρ
��� = 1.23 ��/�
3
, ρ
������� = 13546 ��/�
3
2. Specific Weight or Weight density:
It is the weight per unit volume.
ω=
�
�
�/�
3
, �=�� �
3. Specific Gravity or Relative Density:
It is the ratio of density of substance to standard density.
For solids and liquids the standard density is the density of water.
??????=
�
���������
�
�����
��/�
3
, ??????
�����=1
4. Viscosity:
It is the resistance of fluid flow.
Fluid with high viscosity flows more slowly than fluid with a low viscosity.
Newton's Law of Viscosity: shear stress is directly proportional to the rate of
change of velocity.
Classification of fluids:
1. Ideal fluid:
Fluids which have no viscosity and surface tension.
They are incompressible and not exist in nature.
Fluids with low viscosity like water and air maybe classify as ideal fluid.
2. Real fluid:
Fluids which have viscosity & surface tension.
They are compressible and exist in nature.
3. Newtonian fluid:
Fluids which follow Newton's law of viscosity like water, air, petrol.
4. Non-Newtonian fluid:
Fluids which don't follow Newton's law of viscosity like printer ink.
2.1 Fluids Mechanics and Fluid Properties
Fluid mechanics is the branch of engineering which deals with behavior of fluid at rest & motion
There are three states of matter: Solid, Liquid and Gas. Liquid and gas are both fluids.
Difference between Liquids & Gasses
Liquids Gasses
It is difficult to compress & incompressible.
It has fixed volume.
It is easily to compress
It has no fixed volume; its volume changes with pressure.
Properties of Fluids:
1. Density:
It is the mass per unit volume.
Ρ=
�
�
��/�
3
ρ
����� = 1000 �/�
3
, ρ
��� = 1.23 ��/�
3
, ρ
������� = 13546 ��/�
3
2. Specific Weight or Weight density:
It is the weight per unit volume.
ω=
�
�
�/�
3
, �=�� �
3. Specific Gravity or Relative Density:
It is the ratio of density of substance to standard density.
For solids and liquids the standard density is the density of water.
??????=
�
���������
�
�����
��/�
3
, ??????
�����=1
4. Viscosity:
It is the resistance of fluid flow.
Fluid with high viscosity flows more slowly than fluid with a low viscosity.
Newton's Law of Viscosity: shear stress is directly proportional to the rate of
change of velocity.
Classification of fluids:
1. Ideal fluid:
Fluids which have no viscosity and surface tension.
They are incompressible and not exist in nature.
Fluids with low viscosity like water and air maybe classify as ideal fluid.
2. Real fluid:
Fluids which have viscosity & surface tension.
They are compressible and exist in nature.
3. Newtonian fluid:
Fluids which follow Newton's law of viscosity like water, air, petrol.
4. Non-Newtonian fluid:
Fluids which don't follow Newton's law of viscosity like printer ink.
12
2.2 Pressure and its measurement
Pressure: It is the force per unit area. �=
??????
�
�/�
2
or Pa or SI unit bar ( 1 bar=10
5
�/�
2
)
Pascal's Law for Pressure: Pressure at any point in a fluid is the same in all directions.
Absolute pressure and Gauge pressure: �
��������=�
�����+�
�����������
The pressure at the surface of fluids is the atmospheric pressure (Patmospheric), Pgauge= ρgh
Pressure measurement by Manometer:
Advantages of Manometers:
1. They are very simple
2. No calibration required
Advantages of Manometers:
1. Slow response
2. Difficult to measure small variation in pressure
3. The density changes ( decreased) when temperature changes (increased
4. For "U" Tube Manometer, two measurements must be taken to get the "h" value
The Simple
(Piezometer) Tube
Manometer
pA=ρgh1 , pB= ρgh2
The tube is open to the
atmosphere; so the pressure
measured is relative to atmosphere.
This method can only used for
liquids not for gases and only when
the liquid height is easy to measure.
The "U" Tube
Manometer
PB=Pc
For the left hand arm:
PB=PA+ρgh1
For the right hand arm:
PC=PAtmosphere+ρmangh2
As we measure Pgauge subtract Patm
PB=PC
PA= ρmangh2- ρgh1
This method can use for both liquids
and gases.
Measurement of
Pressure
Difference Using a
"U" Tube
Manometer
PC=PD
PC=PA+ ρgha
PD=PB+ ρg(hb-h)+ ρmangh
PA+ ρgha =PB+ ρg(hb-h)+ ρmangh
The pressure difference:
PA-PB= ρg(hb-ha)+( ρman- ρ) gh
Tilted Manometer
The pressure difference:
P1-P2= ρgz2
=ρg xsinθ
2.2 Pressure and its measurement
Pressure: It is the force per unit area. �=
??????
�
�/�
2
or Pa or SI unit bar ( 1 bar=10
5
�/�
2
)
Pascal's Law for Pressure: Pressure at any point in a fluid is the same in all directions.
Absolute pressure and Gauge pressure: �
��������=�
�����+�
�����������
The pressure at the surface of fluids is the atmospheric pressure (Patmospheric), Pgauge= ρgh
Pressure measurement by Manometer:
Advantages of Manometers:
1. They are very simple
2. No calibration required
Advantages of Manometers:
1. Slow response
2. Difficult to measure small variation in pressure
3. The density changes ( decreased) when temperature changes (increased
4. For "U" Tube Manometer, two measurements must be taken to get the "h" value
The Simple
(Piezometer) Tube
Manometer
pA=ρgh1 , pB= ρgh2
The tube is open to the
atmosphere; so the pressure
measured is relative to atmosphere.
This method can only used for
liquids not for gases and only when
the liquid height is easy to measure.
The "U" Tube
Manometer
PB=Pc
For the left hand arm:
PB=PA+ρgh1
For the right hand arm:
PC=PAtmosphere+ρmangh2
As we measure Pgauge subtract Patm
PB=PC
PA= ρmangh2- ρgh1
This method can use for both liquids
and gases.
Measurement of
Pressure
Difference Using a
"U" Tube
Manometer
PC=PD
PC=PA+ ρgha
PD=PB+ ρg(hb-h)+ ρmangh
PA+ ρgha =PB+ ρg(hb-h)+ ρmangh
The pressure difference:
PA-PB= ρg(hb-ha)+( ρman- ρ) gh
Tilted Manometer
The pressure difference:
P1-P2= ρgz2
=ρg xsinθ
13
2.3 Laminar and Turbulent Flow
Laminar flow: The fluid practices move regular and order in straight lines.
Re<2000
It is stable flow
Low viscosity
Dye doesn’t mix with water
Fluid particles move in straight lines
Turbulent flow: The fluid practices move irregular in jagged lines
Re>4000
It is unstable flow
High velocity
Dye completely mixes with water
Fluid particles move irregular in jagged lines
Most common type of flow
Transitional flow: The fluid practices move in wave lines.
2000> Re <4000
Medium velocity
Dye partly mixes with water
Fluid practices move in wave lines
The Reynolds number: Re=
��
??????
=
�������� ������
������� ������
,u=velocity, d=diameter
2.4 Fluid Flow Analysis
Uniform Flow & Steady Flow
Uniform flow: If the flow velocity is the same at every point in the fluid.
Non-uniform Flow: If the flow velocity isn't the same at every point in the fluid.
Steady Flow: The velocity & pressure at a point don’t change with time.
Unsteady Flow: The velocity & pressure at a point change with time.
Compressible & Incompressible Flow
Compressible flow: The density of fluid changes from point to point. Example: flow of gases.
Incompressible flow: The density of fluid is constant from point to point. Example: flow of
liquid. All fluids are compressible (their density will change) when pressure changes.
Dimensional Flow
One dimensional flow: The fluid flows in one direction only. Example: flow in pipe.
Two dimensional flow: The fluid flows in two directions (x & y). Example: flow in parallel
pates.
Three dimensional flow: The fluid flows in three directions. Example: flow in a convergent or
divergent pipe.
Mass flow rate: It is the mass per unit time. Mass flow rate =
����
����
��/�
Volume flow rate (Discharge): It is the volume per unit time. Q=
������ �� �����
����
=�� �
3
/�
A= area, u= velocity
2.3 Laminar and Turbulent Flow
Laminar flow: The fluid practices move regular and order in straight lines.
Re<2000
It is stable flow
Low viscosity
Dye doesn’t mix with water
Fluid particles move in straight lines
Turbulent flow: The fluid practices move irregular in jagged lines
Re>4000
It is unstable flow
High velocity
Dye completely mixes with water
Fluid particles move irregular in jagged lines
Most common type of flow
Transitional flow: The fluid practices move in wave lines.
2000> Re <4000
Medium velocity
Dye partly mixes with water
Fluid practices move in wave lines
The Reynolds number: Re=
��
??????
=
�������� ������
������� ������
,u=velocity, d=diameter
2.4 Fluid Flow Analysis
Uniform Flow & Steady Flow
Uniform flow: If the flow velocity is the same at every point in the fluid.
Non-uniform Flow: If the flow velocity isn't the same at every point in the fluid.
Steady Flow: The velocity & pressure at a point don’t change with time.
Unsteady Flow: The velocity & pressure at a point change with time.
Compressible & Incompressible Flow
Compressible flow: The density of fluid changes from point to point. Example: flow of gases.
Incompressible flow: The density of fluid is constant from point to point. Example: flow of
liquid. All fluids are compressible (their density will change) when pressure changes.
Dimensional Flow
One dimensional flow: The fluid flows in one direction only. Example: flow in pipe.
Two dimensional flow: The fluid flows in two directions (x & y). Example: flow in parallel
pates.
Three dimensional flow: The fluid flows in three directions. Example: flow in a convergent or
divergent pipe.
Mass flow rate: It is the mass per unit time. Mass flow rate =
����
����
��/�
Volume flow rate (Discharge): It is the volume per unit time. Q=
������ �� �����
����
=�� �
3
/�
A= area, u= velocity
14
2.5 Continuity and Bernoulli's Equation
Continuity Equation: It is a statement of mass conservation (matter cannot be created or destroyed)
Mass entering per unit time = Mass leaving per unit time
A1u1 = A2u2 = Q
Applications of Continuity Equation:
1. Pipe with a contraction:
Q1 = Q2
A1u1 = A2u2
�
�=[
�
�
�
�
]
�
�
�
�=
��
�
�
2. Pipe with expands or diverges:
Q1 = Q2
A1u1 = A2u2
�
�=[
�
�
�
�
]
�
�
�
�=
��
�
�
3. Pipes coming from a junction:
Q1 = Q2 + Q3
A1u1 = A2u2 + A3u3
�=
��
�
�
4. Flow from a reservoir:
�
�=�
�
�=√��(�
�−�
�)
�=
��
�
�
�=��
Bernoulli's Equation: The sum of pressure head, velocity head and potential head is constant.
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�=
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�
�
��
+
�
�
��
+�=�
�
��
= Pressure head,
�
�
��
= Velocity head, � = Potential head, H= Total head
Applications of Bernoulli's Equation:
1. Venture meter: It is a device used for measuring discharge in a pipe.
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�=
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�
Z1=Z2
Q=A1u1 = A2u2
2. Flow through Orifice: The fluid flow thorough the sharp edged orifice.
(�
�=�),(�
�=�),(�
�=�),(�
�=�),(�
�=�)
�
�=√���
�=��
2.5 Continuity and Bernoulli's Equation
Continuity Equation: It is a statement of mass conservation (matter cannot be created or destroyed)
Mass entering per unit time = Mass leaving per unit time
A1u1 = A2u2 = Q
Applications of Continuity Equation:
1. Pipe with a contraction:
Q1 = Q2
A1u1 = A2u2
�
�=[
�
�
�
�
]
�
�
�
�=
��
�
�
2. Pipe with expands or diverges:
Q1 = Q2
A1u1 = A2u2
�
�=[
�
�
�
�
]
�
�
�
�=
��
�
�
3. Pipes coming from a junction:
Q1 = Q2 + Q3
A1u1 = A2u2 + A3u3
�=
��
�
�
4. Flow from a reservoir:
�
�=�
�
�=√��(�
�−�
�)
�=
��
�
�
�=��
Bernoulli's Equation: The sum of pressure head, velocity head and potential head is constant.
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�=
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�
�
��
+
�
�
��
+�=�
�
��
= Pressure head,
�
�
��
= Velocity head, � = Potential head, H= Total head
Applications of Bernoulli's Equation:
1. Venture meter: It is a device used for measuring discharge in a pipe.
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�=
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�
Z1=Z2
Q=A1u1 = A2u2
2. Flow through Orifice: The fluid flow thorough the sharp edged orifice.
(�
�=�),(�
�=�),(�
�=�),(�
�=�),(�
�=�)
�
�=√���
�=��
15
3. Stagnation Pressure: the fluid goes to the head of blunt body and stops, because at
this point (stagnation point) the velocity is zero. Pressure at stagnation point called
Stagnation Pressure
(�
�=�
�),�� ����� � (�
�=�)
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�=
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�
�
�=�
�+
�
�
��
�
�
Stagnation Pressure = Static Pressure + Dynamic Pressure
4. Pilot Tube: Two piezometers, one as normal and one as pilot tube within the pipe
used to measure velocity of flow.
(�
�=�
�),(�
�=�)
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�=
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�
�
�=�
�+
�
�
��
�
�
���
�=���
�+
�
�
��
�
�
�
�=√��(�
�−�
�)
2.6 Fluid Losses in Pipes
Losses due to friction: These losses depend on:
1. Roughness of the inside surface of the pipe
2. Reynolds number
Losses due to pipe fittings: These include:
1. Bends
2. Valves
3. Sudden or Gradual Enlargement
4. Sudden or Gradual contraction
5. Exit loss
6. Entry loss ( similar to Sudden contraction )
2.7 Fluid Power System
Fluid Power: It is deals with the generation, control and transmission of power, using Pressurized fluids
It is used to push, pull, regulate or drive of all the machines of industry.
Difference between Hydraulics and Pneumatics:
Hydraulics Pneumatics
The fluid is a liquid such as water, diesel and
petroleum.
It is used for high pressure applications(4000 kN loads)
The fluid is a gas such as air.
It is used for low pressure applications
(30 kN loads)
Advantages of fluid power:
1. Less loss of power, so more efficiency
2. Large force with great accuracy
3. Linear or rotary force can be multiplied the output power
Disadvantages of fluid power:
1. Flammable hydraulic fluid may create fire hazards
2. Pneumatic system, such as compressor may create explosive
3. Stagnation Pressure: the fluid goes to the head of blunt body and stops, because at
this point (stagnation point) the velocity is zero. Pressure at stagnation point called
Stagnation Pressure
(�
�=�
�),�� ����� � (�
�=�)
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�=
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�
�
�=�
�+
�
�
��
�
�
Stagnation Pressure = Static Pressure + Dynamic Pressure
4. Pilot Tube: Two piezometers, one as normal and one as pilot tube within the pipe
used to measure velocity of flow.
(�
�=�
�),(�
�=�)
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�=
�
�
��
+
�
�
�
��
+�
�
�
�=�
�+
�
�
��
�
�
���
�=���
�+
�
�
��
�
�
�
�=√��(�
�−�
�)
2.6 Fluid Losses in Pipes
Losses due to friction: These losses depend on:
1. Roughness of the inside surface of the pipe
2. Reynolds number
Losses due to pipe fittings: These include:
1. Bends
2. Valves
3. Sudden or Gradual Enlargement
4. Sudden or Gradual contraction
5. Exit loss
6. Entry loss ( similar to Sudden contraction )
2.7 Fluid Power System
Fluid Power: It is deals with the generation, control and transmission of power, using Pressurized fluids
It is used to push, pull, regulate or drive of all the machines of industry.
Difference between Hydraulics and Pneumatics:
Hydraulics Pneumatics
The fluid is a liquid such as water, diesel and
petroleum.
It is used for high pressure applications(4000 kN loads)
The fluid is a gas such as air.
It is used for low pressure applications
(30 kN loads)
Advantages of fluid power:
1. Less loss of power, so more efficiency
2. Large force with great accuracy
3. Linear or rotary force can be multiplied the output power
Disadvantages of fluid power:
1. Flammable hydraulic fluid may create fire hazards
2. Pneumatic system, such as compressor may create explosive
16
Fluid power applications:
1. Manufacturing industry: Hydraulic presses, pneumatic hand tools, etc.
2. Automobile industry: Hydraulic brakes, Power steering, etc.
3. Material handling field: Hydraulic lift truck, Hydraulic jacks, Hydraulic elevators, etc.
4. Construction field: Earth moving equipment.
Basic components of fluid power system:
Hydraulic pump or air compressor: It converts mechanical power to fluid power.
Actuator: It converts fluid power to linear or rotary mechanical power.
Valves: They control direction, pressure and rate of flow.
Filters: They remove particles pollutions from fluid.
Tubes, Fittings, Coupling, etc: They link the fluid between components.
Sealing devices: They help to contain the fluid.
Accumulators and reservoirs: They store the fluid.
Instruments such as pressure gauge, flow mater: They are used to monitor the
performance of fluid power system.
Principle of Hydraulics or (Pascal's Law): When given load over
a smaller area, the force produced on a larger area is higher.
�
�=�
�→
�
�
�
�
=
�
�
�
�
→ �
�=
�
��
�
�
�
Principle of Pneumatics or (Boyle's Law): The pressure of gas is
inversely proportional to its volume, when the temperature is constant.
�∝
�
�
→ �
��
�=�
��
�
2.8 Hydraulic Pumps & Gas Compressors
Hydraulic Pumps: It is a mechanical device that increases the pressure of a liquid by reducing
its volume. It is the heart of hydraulic system. Symbol
Gas Compressors: It is a mechanical device that increases the pressure of a gas by reducing
its volume. Symbol
Classification of (Pumps & Compressors):
1. Non Positive Displacement (Pumps or Compressors) or (Centrifugal Pumps or Compressors):
Use impeller to force the fluid to the volute casing which convert kinetic energy into
pressure energy.
They are used for low pressure and high volume applications (up to 40 bar).
They are used for fluid transportation and circulation etc.
2. Positive displacement (Pumps & Compressors):
They apply pressure directly to the fluid by reciprocating piston or by rotating member.
It is used for very high pressure fluids (up to 700 bar).
They are used for variable viscosity applications.
Classification of Positive displacement (Pumps & Compressors):
1. Reciprocating (Pumps & Compressors): In this pump or compressor, the chamber is
a stationary cylinder that contains piston or plunger. They are classified as:
i. Piston Pumps, ii. Plunger Pumps, iii. Diaphragm Pumps
2. Rotary (Pumps & Compressors): In this pump or compressor, the chamber moves from inlet to
discharge and back to the inlet. They are classified as:
i. Gear Pumps, ii. Lobe Pumps, iii. Screw Pumps, iv. Vane Pumps
Fluid power applications:
1. Manufacturing industry: Hydraulic presses, pneumatic hand tools, etc.
2. Automobile industry: Hydraulic brakes, Power steering, etc.
3. Material handling field: Hydraulic lift truck, Hydraulic jacks, Hydraulic elevators, etc.
4. Construction field: Earth moving equipment.
Basic components of fluid power system:
Hydraulic pump or air compressor: It converts mechanical power to fluid power.
Actuator: It converts fluid power to linear or rotary mechanical power.
Valves: They control direction, pressure and rate of flow.
Filters: They remove particles pollutions from fluid.
Tubes, Fittings, Coupling, etc: They link the fluid between components.
Sealing devices: They help to contain the fluid.
Accumulators and reservoirs: They store the fluid.
Instruments such as pressure gauge, flow mater: They are used to monitor the
performance of fluid power system.
Principle of Hydraulics or (Pascal's Law): When given load over
a smaller area, the force produced on a larger area is higher.
�
�=�
�→
�
�
�
�
=
�
�
�
�
→ �
�=
�
��
�
�
�
Principle of Pneumatics or (Boyle's Law): The pressure of gas is
inversely proportional to its volume, when the temperature is constant.
�∝
�
�
→ �
��
�=�
��
�
2.8 Hydraulic Pumps & Gas Compressors
Hydraulic Pumps: It is a mechanical device that increases the pressure of a liquid by reducing
its volume. It is the heart of hydraulic system. Symbol
Gas Compressors: It is a mechanical device that increases the pressure of a gas by reducing
its volume. Symbol
Classification of (Pumps & Compressors):
1. Non Positive Displacement (Pumps or Compressors) or (Centrifugal Pumps or Compressors):
Use impeller to force the fluid to the volute casing which convert kinetic energy into
pressure energy.
They are used for low pressure and high volume applications (up to 40 bar).
They are used for fluid transportation and circulation etc.
2. Positive displacement (Pumps & Compressors):
They apply pressure directly to the fluid by reciprocating piston or by rotating member.
It is used for very high pressure fluids (up to 700 bar).
They are used for variable viscosity applications.
Classification of Positive displacement (Pumps & Compressors):
1. Reciprocating (Pumps & Compressors): In this pump or compressor, the chamber is
a stationary cylinder that contains piston or plunger. They are classified as:
i. Piston Pumps, ii. Plunger Pumps, iii. Diaphragm Pumps
2. Rotary (Pumps & Compressors): In this pump or compressor, the chamber moves from inlet to
discharge and back to the inlet. They are classified as:
i. Gear Pumps, ii. Lobe Pumps, iii. Screw Pumps, iv. Vane Pumps
17
Types How do they work Simple pictures
Centrifugal
Pumps
Liquid forced into impeller from suction
eye.
Vanes produce kinetic energy to liquid,
liquid rotates and leaves impeller.
Volute casing converts kinetic energy into
pressure energy.
Centrifugal
Compressor
Liquid forced into impeller from suction
eye.
Vanes produce kinetic energy to liquid,
liquid rotates and leaves impeller.
Diffuser decreases or converts kinetic
energy into pressure energy of gas.
Piston
Pumps &
Compressor
When the piston moves to the left, it
creates vacuum inside the cylinder.
Because pressure difference between
atmosphere pressure and cylinder
pressure, the liquid moves from tank to
cylinder by open inlet valve and close outlet
valve.
When the piston stops, both valves are
closed and when the piston is starting
moves to the right, the pressure increased
and discharge valve open.
Plunger
Pumps &
Compressor
The plunger moves back and forth by motor
driving.
Because of pressure difference between
atmosphere pressure and cylinder
pressure, the liquid moves from tank to
cylinder by open inlet valve and close outlet
valve.
When both valves are closed, the plunger
increases the pressure of liquid and then
discharge valve open and high pressure
liquid goes out.
Diaphragm
Pumps &
Compressor
The diaphragm moves back and forth by
motor driving.
Because of pressure difference between
atmosphere pressure and cylinder
pressure, the liquid moves from tank to
cylinder by open inlet valve and close outlet
valve.
When both valves are closed, the
diaphragm increases the pressure of liquid
and then discharge valve open and high
pressure liquid goes out.
Gear Pump
&
Compressor
They have two gears, one is connected to
the driver shaft and other is driven as its
meshes with the driver gear.
As the gears come out of mesh, they create
expanding volume and low pressure on the
inlet side of the pump. Liquid flows into the
pump because pressure difference.
Liquid travels around between teeth and
casing; they create compression volume
and high pressure.
Finally, the gears go into mesh and forces
liquid through discharge under pressure.
Types How do they work Simple pictures
Centrifugal
Pumps
Liquid forced into impeller from suction
eye.
Vanes produce kinetic energy to liquid,
liquid rotates and leaves impeller.
Volute casing converts kinetic energy into
pressure energy.
Centrifugal
Compressor
Liquid forced into impeller from suction
eye.
Vanes produce kinetic energy to liquid,
liquid rotates and leaves impeller.
Diffuser decreases or converts kinetic
energy into pressure energy of gas.
Piston
Pumps &
Compressor
When the piston moves to the left, it
creates vacuum inside the cylinder.
Because pressure difference between
atmosphere pressure and cylinder
pressure, the liquid moves from tank to
cylinder by open inlet valve and close outlet
valve.
When the piston stops, both valves are
closed and when the piston is starting
moves to the right, the pressure increased
and discharge valve open.
Plunger
Pumps &
Compressor
The plunger moves back and forth by motor
driving.
Because of pressure difference between
atmosphere pressure and cylinder
pressure, the liquid moves from tank to
cylinder by open inlet valve and close outlet
valve.
When both valves are closed, the plunger
increases the pressure of liquid and then
discharge valve open and high pressure
liquid goes out.
Diaphragm
Pumps &
Compressor
The diaphragm moves back and forth by
motor driving.
Because of pressure difference between
atmosphere pressure and cylinder
pressure, the liquid moves from tank to
cylinder by open inlet valve and close outlet
valve.
When both valves are closed, the
diaphragm increases the pressure of liquid
and then discharge valve open and high
pressure liquid goes out.
Gear Pump
&
Compressor
They have two gears, one is connected to
the driver shaft and other is driven as its
meshes with the driver gear.
As the gears come out of mesh, they create
expanding volume and low pressure on the
inlet side of the pump. Liquid flows into the
pump because pressure difference.
Liquid travels around between teeth and
casing; they create compression volume
and high pressure.
Finally, the gears go into mesh and forces
liquid through discharge under pressure.
18
2.9 Hydraulic & Pneumatic Actuators
Hydraulic Actuators: They convert hydraulic energy of pump into mechanical power.
Pneumatic Actuator: They convert pneumatic energy of compressor into mechanical power.
Classification of Actuators:
1. Linear Actuators:
They convert fluid energy into linear force and linear motion.
They are cylinder-piston system which moves back and forth during the operation cycle.
Types of linear Actuators:
i. Single acting type
ii. Double acting type
2. Semi-Rotary Actuator:
They convert fluid energy into limited rotation or oscillatory motion.
They are known as limited rotation motor.
Types of Semi-Rotary Actuators:
i. Vane type
ii. Piston type
3. Rotary Actuators:
They convert fluid energy into rotational motion.
They are known as rotation motor.
Types of Rotary Actuators:
i. Gear motor
ii. Vane motor
iii. Piston motor
Types of Rotary
Actuators
How do they work Simple pictures Symbols
Single acting type
It has only one port at one end of the
cylinder.
The fluid pressure enters from pressure
port and pushes the piston forward.
When the fluid pressure is cut off, the
piston returns to its position by a spring.
Double acting
type
It has two ports at both ends of the
cylinder.
The fluid pressure enters from port 1
and pushes the piston forward.
The fluid pressure is cut off from port 1
and start flow from port 2 to return
piston to its position.
Gear motor
It is similar to gear pump & gear
Compressor.
It is also similar to electric motors but is
run on hydraulic or pneumatic power.
They have two gears, one is connected
to the driver shaft and other is driven as
its meshes with the driver gear.
Compressed fluid enters from inlet and
rotates the gears and produced torque.
2.9 Hydraulic & Pneumatic Actuators
Hydraulic Actuators: They convert hydraulic energy of pump into mechanical power.
Pneumatic Actuator: They convert pneumatic energy of compressor into mechanical power.
Classification of Actuators:
1. Linear Actuators:
They convert fluid energy into linear force and linear motion.
They are cylinder-piston system which moves back and forth during the operation cycle.
Types of linear Actuators:
i. Single acting type
ii. Double acting type
2. Semi-Rotary Actuator:
They convert fluid energy into limited rotation or oscillatory motion.
They are known as limited rotation motor.
Types of Semi-Rotary Actuators:
i. Vane type
ii. Piston type
3. Rotary Actuators:
They convert fluid energy into rotational motion.
They are known as rotation motor.
Types of Rotary Actuators:
i. Gear motor
ii. Vane motor
iii. Piston motor
Types of Rotary
Actuators
How do they work Simple pictures Symbols
Single acting type
It has only one port at one end of the
cylinder.
The fluid pressure enters from pressure
port and pushes the piston forward.
When the fluid pressure is cut off, the
piston returns to its position by a spring.
Double acting
type
It has two ports at both ends of the
cylinder.
The fluid pressure enters from port 1
and pushes the piston forward.
The fluid pressure is cut off from port 1
and start flow from port 2 to return
piston to its position.
Gear motor
It is similar to gear pump & gear
Compressor.
It is also similar to electric motors but is
run on hydraulic or pneumatic power.
They have two gears, one is connected
to the driver shaft and other is driven as
its meshes with the driver gear.
Compressed fluid enters from inlet and
rotates the gears and produced torque.
19
2.10 Hydraulic & Pneumatic Valves
The pressurized fluid form Pump or Compressor is moved to the actuators using Valves.
Valves are used to control:
1. Direction of flow
2. Pressure of flow
3. Quantity of flow
4. Stoppage of flow
Classification of Valves:
1. Direction control valve (D.C. Valves):
They are used to reverse the direction of actuator, and to start and stop piston
movement.
Classification of D.C. Valves:
I) Based on construction:
1) Seat or Poppet valve
2) Spool valve or sliding valve
a) Rotary spool valve
b) Sliding spool valve
II) Based on Number of ports:
1) Two way valve (Check valves):
It has two ports, it is also called non-return valves
It is used to allow flow in only one direction.
Poppet & pilot operated are types of check valves.
2) Three way valve
3) Four way valve
III) Based on number of ports & number of valve position:
1) Two way, two position valves (2/2 valves)
2) Three way, two position valves (3/2 valves)
3) Four way, two position valves (4/2 valves)
4) Four way, three position valves (4/3 valves)
IV) Based on the type of power source used:
1) Shuttle valve
V) Based on the mode of actuation of D.C. valves:
2) Manually operated D.C. valves
3) Mechanically operated D.C. valves
4) Solenoid operated D.C. valves
5) Pilot operated D.C. valves
2. Pressure control valve:
They are used to reducing / increasing pressure, and providing maximum pressure
thereby ensuring safety.
Classification of pressure control Valves:
I) Pressure relief valve:
1) Direct acting or simple pressure relief valve
2) Pilot operated or compound pressure relief valve
3. Flow control valve:
They are used to control the speed of actuator by controlling the rate of fluid flow.
Classification of pressure control Valves:
I) Globe valve
II) Needle valve
2.10 Hydraulic & Pneumatic Valves
The pressurized fluid form Pump or Compressor is moved to the actuators using Valves.
Valves are used to control:
1. Direction of flow
2. Pressure of flow
3. Quantity of flow
4. Stoppage of flow
Classification of Valves:
1. Direction control valve (D.C. Valves):
They are used to reverse the direction of actuator, and to start and stop piston
movement.
Classification of D.C. Valves:
I) Based on construction:
1) Seat or Poppet valve
2) Spool valve or sliding valve
a) Rotary spool valve
b) Sliding spool valve
II) Based on Number of ports:
1) Two way valve (Check valves):
It has two ports, it is also called non-return valves
It is used to allow flow in only one direction.
Poppet & pilot operated are types of check valves.
2) Three way valve
3) Four way valve
III) Based on number of ports & number of valve position:
1) Two way, two position valves (2/2 valves)
2) Three way, two position valves (3/2 valves)
3) Four way, two position valves (4/2 valves)
4) Four way, three position valves (4/3 valves)
IV) Based on the type of power source used:
1) Shuttle valve
V) Based on the mode of actuation of D.C. valves:
2) Manually operated D.C. valves
3) Mechanically operated D.C. valves
4) Solenoid operated D.C. valves
5) Pilot operated D.C. valves
2. Pressure control valve:
They are used to reducing / increasing pressure, and providing maximum pressure
thereby ensuring safety.
Classification of pressure control Valves:
I) Pressure relief valve:
1) Direct acting or simple pressure relief valve
2) Pilot operated or compound pressure relief valve
3. Flow control valve:
They are used to control the speed of actuator by controlling the rate of fluid flow.
Classification of pressure control Valves:
I) Globe valve
II) Needle valve
20
Type of
Valve
How do they work Simple pictures Symbols
Seat or
Poppet
valve
It consists of poppet or ball, return spring
and push button.
When push button is depressed, ball is
pushed out of its seat and fluid flow from
port 1 to port 2
When push button is released, ball is
returned to its seat by spring and stop flow.
Flow path
Flow shut off
Valve
Push
button
Lever
Pedal
Plunger
Spring
Sliding
spool
valve
It consists of small piston like spool placed
inside the valve body.
The spool slides inside the valve body to
open and close the ports.
Pilot
operated
check
valve
It allows the reverse flow.
When fluid flow in the normal direction,
the fluid pressure pushed the poppet out
of its seat and fluid flow from port A to
port B.
To allow the fluid flow in reverse
direction, the pilot pressure pushes the
pilot piston and the poppet down.
Poppet
type
check
valve
Position 1
When fluid flow in the normal direction,the
fluid pressure pushed the poppet out of its
seat and fluid flow from port in to port out.
Position 2
When flow stop, the poppet returns to its
seat by spring and fluid can't pass in the
reverse direction.
Check valve
or Non-return
valve
The 2/2
D.C.
valve
Position 1
When push button is depressed, ball is
pushed out of its seat and fluid flow from
port P to port A.
Position 2
When push button is released, ball is
returned to its seat by spring and stop flow.
2/2 D.C. valve
open
2/2 D.C. valve
open
Shuttle
valve
It is used when control more than one
power source.
When the pressure in the right inlet port is
greater than the left port inlet, the shuttle
piston closes the left port.
When the pressure in the left inlet port is
greater than the right inlet port, the shuttle
piston closes the right port.
4/2 D.C. valve
4/3 D.C. valve
Needle
valve
It has a Stem that adjusted manually to
control flow rate.
It has a smaller flow area and higher
pressure than Globe valve.
Simple
pressure
relief
valve
It is used to prevent rising in the pressure.
When the pressure exceeds set limit, the
fluid forced the spring to allow fluid to flow
to the tank port.
Otherwise the valve is closed.
Type of
Valve
How do they work Simple pictures Symbols
Seat or
Poppet
valve
It consists of poppet or ball, return spring
and push button.
When push button is depressed, ball is
pushed out of its seat and fluid flow from
port 1 to port 2
When push button is released, ball is
returned to its seat by spring and stop flow.
Flow path
Flow shut off
Valve
Push
button
Lever
Pedal
Plunger
Spring
Sliding
spool
valve
It consists of small piston like spool placed
inside the valve body.
The spool slides inside the valve body to
open and close the ports.
Pilot
operated
check
valve
It allows the reverse flow.
When fluid flow in the normal direction,
the fluid pressure pushed the poppet out
of its seat and fluid flow from port A to
port B.
To allow the fluid flow in reverse
direction, the pilot pressure pushes the
pilot piston and the poppet down.
Poppet
type
check
valve
Position 1
When fluid flow in the normal direction,the
fluid pressure pushed the poppet out of its
seat and fluid flow from port in to port out.
Position 2
When flow stop, the poppet returns to its
seat by spring and fluid can't pass in the
reverse direction.
Check valve
or Non-return
valve
The 2/2
D.C.
valve
Position 1
When push button is depressed, ball is
pushed out of its seat and fluid flow from
port P to port A.
Position 2
When push button is released, ball is
returned to its seat by spring and stop flow.
2/2 D.C. valve
open
2/2 D.C. valve
open
Shuttle
valve
It is used when control more than one
power source.
When the pressure in the right inlet port is
greater than the left port inlet, the shuttle
piston closes the left port.
When the pressure in the left inlet port is
greater than the right inlet port, the shuttle
piston closes the right port.
4/2 D.C. valve
4/3 D.C. valve
Needle
valve
It has a Stem that adjusted manually to
control flow rate.
It has a smaller flow area and higher
pressure than Globe valve.
Simple
pressure
relief
valve
It is used to prevent rising in the pressure.
When the pressure exceeds set limit, the
fluid forced the spring to allow fluid to flow
to the tank port.
Otherwise the valve is closed.
21
2.11 Seals
Function of Seals:
a) Control of external and internal leakage of fluid.
b) Control of fluid loss
c) Maintenance of system pressure
d) Prevent of pollution entering the system
Classification of Seals:
1. According to the method of sealing: Positive sealing (prevents leakage) and non-positive
sealing (allows small leakage for lubrication).
2. According to their location in a system: Static seals (used when no movement occurs between
parts) and dynamic seals (used when movement occurs between parts).
3. According to geometric shape of sealing: U-cup ring, Hat ring, T-ring, Quad ring, O-ring, V-ring.
4. According to seal material: Leather seals, Metal seals, Polymers, Elastomers and plastic seals,
Nylon seals etc.
2.12 Filters
Function of Filters:
a) Remove particles pollutions from fluid.
b) Increase life of system component and fluid.
Classification of Filters:
1. According to the distance:
i. Surface Filter: It has less thickness and less capacity.
ii. Depth Filter: It has more thickness and more capacity.
2. Full flow filter: All fluid pass through the filter, whether need filtration or not.
3. By-pass filter: Part of fluid passes through the filter, only which need filtration.
FRL Unit:
The combination of Filter, Regulator and Lubricator.
The compressed fluid is first filtered and then pressure regulated and finally lubricated.
2.13 Accumulators & Reservoir
Accumulators:
It is a device which stores the potential energy of fluid.
Types of Accumulator:
1. Gravity or dead weight type
2. Spring loaded type
3. Gas loaded type
i. Non-Separator type
ii. Separator type
a) Piston type
b) Diaphragm type
c) Bag or Bladder type
Applications of accumulator:
1. Pressure compensation
2. Leakage compensation
3. Emergency source of power
2.11 Seals
Function of Seals:
a) Control of external and internal leakage of fluid.
b) Control of fluid loss
c) Maintenance of system pressure
d) Prevent of pollution entering the system
Classification of Seals:
1. According to the method of sealing: Positive sealing (prevents leakage) and non-positive
sealing (allows small leakage for lubrication).
2. According to their location in a system: Static seals (used when no movement occurs between
parts) and dynamic seals (used when movement occurs between parts).
3. According to geometric shape of sealing: U-cup ring, Hat ring, T-ring, Quad ring, O-ring, V-ring.
4. According to seal material: Leather seals, Metal seals, Polymers, Elastomers and plastic seals,
Nylon seals etc.
2.12 Filters
Function of Filters:
a) Remove particles pollutions from fluid.
b) Increase life of system component and fluid.
Classification of Filters:
1. According to the distance:
i. Surface Filter: It has less thickness and less capacity.
ii. Depth Filter: It has more thickness and more capacity.
2. Full flow filter: All fluid pass through the filter, whether need filtration or not.
3. By-pass filter: Part of fluid passes through the filter, only which need filtration.
FRL Unit:
The combination of Filter, Regulator and Lubricator.
The compressed fluid is first filtered and then pressure regulated and finally lubricated.
2.13 Accumulators & Reservoir
Accumulators:
It is a device which stores the potential energy of fluid.
Types of Accumulator:
1. Gravity or dead weight type
2. Spring loaded type
3. Gas loaded type
i. Non-Separator type
ii. Separator type
a) Piston type
b) Diaphragm type
c) Bag or Bladder type
Applications of accumulator:
1. Pressure compensation
2. Leakage compensation
3. Emergency source of power
22
Reservoir:
It is a device used to store the fluid.
Functions of Reservoir:
1. Oil storage: It provides sufficient volume to store oil.
2. Heat dissipation from oil: It provides large surface area to dissipate heated oil.
3. Thermal expiation of fluid: It provides extra space to be ready for thermal expansion
of fluid.
4. Separation of various contaminants: It is used Gause baffles to separate contaminants
from oil.
5. Controlling turbulent flow: It is used Baffle plates to control turbulent flow.
Feature of Reservoir
Type of
Accumulator
How do they work Simple pictures
Dead weight
type
It consists of cylinder housing a piston with packing
inside to prevent leakage.
The force of gravity of the dead weight is used to
store potential energy.
Spring loaded
type
It consists of cylinder housing a piston with spring.
The force of compression spring is used to store
potential energy.
Non-Separator
gas loaded type
It consists of cylinder having one oil part at the
bottom which contacts with a gas on the top.
Storage of potential energy is due to compression of
gas.
The expansion of gas forces the oil out of the
accumulator.
Separator
piston type
It consists of spherical vessel which has fluid
chamber at the top and separated with air chamber
on the bottom by diaphragm.
When the oil enters into accumulator, it pushes the
diaphragm and compressed the air.
This gas pressure is used as the potential energy to
force the oil out when it is required.
Bag or Bladder
type
It consists of bag or bladder placed inside the
accumulator which has gas and oil which placed
outside the bag.
When the oil enters into accumulator, it pushes the
bag and compressed the air inside the bag.
This gas pressure is used as the potential energy to
force the oil out when it is required.
Reservoir:
It is a device used to store the fluid.
Functions of Reservoir:
1. Oil storage: It provides sufficient volume to store oil.
2. Heat dissipation from oil: It provides large surface area to dissipate heated oil.
3. Thermal expiation of fluid: It provides extra space to be ready for thermal expansion
of fluid.
4. Separation of various contaminants: It is used Gause baffles to separate contaminants
from oil.
5. Controlling turbulent flow: It is used Baffle plates to control turbulent flow.
Feature of Reservoir
Type of
Accumulator
How do they work Simple pictures
Dead weight
type
It consists of cylinder housing a piston with packing
inside to prevent leakage.
The force of gravity of the dead weight is used to
store potential energy.
Spring loaded
type
It consists of cylinder housing a piston with spring.
The force of compression spring is used to store
potential energy.
Non-Separator
gas loaded type
It consists of cylinder having one oil part at the
bottom which contacts with a gas on the top.
Storage of potential energy is due to compression of
gas.
The expansion of gas forces the oil out of the
accumulator.
Separator
piston type
It consists of spherical vessel which has fluid
chamber at the top and separated with air chamber
on the bottom by diaphragm.
When the oil enters into accumulator, it pushes the
diaphragm and compressed the air.
This gas pressure is used as the potential energy to
force the oil out when it is required.
Bag or Bladder
type
It consists of bag or bladder placed inside the
accumulator which has gas and oil which placed
outside the bag.
When the oil enters into accumulator, it pushes the
bag and compressed the air inside the bag.
This gas pressure is used as the potential energy to
force the oil out when it is required.
23
2.14 Hydraulic Fluids
It is used to transmit and control energy in a system.
Incompressible fluids like oils and water are used in hydraulic systems.
Function of Hydraulic fluids:
To transmit power
To lubricate moving parts
To seal gaps and cleaning parts
To dissipate heat causing friction
To prevent rust and corrosion
Types of hydraulic fluids:
1. Mineral oils
2. Oil in water
3. Water in oil
4. Water glycol
Desirable properties of hydraulic fluids:
1. Specific gravity: It is an important property for design of pump, reservoir, piping sizing and for
calculation of pressure at pump inlet.
2. Viscosity: Should have low enough viscosity for lubricate surface and for easy flow ability. Also
having enough viscosity for seal gaps and leakage.
3. Coefficient of thermal expansion: provision in the system design as pipe design, reservoir
design etc.
4. Flammability: Must be non- flammable and should have high flash point and fire point.
5. Gumming tendency: Should have minimum gumming tendency to avoid reduced in flow area.
6. Oxidation tendency: Should have minimum oxidation tendency to avoid changed in oil
characteristics.
7. Corrosion resistance: Should have high corrosion resistance to get longer life of the system.
2.15 Turbines
Hydro turbine: It converts potential energy of water into mechanical energy or electric energy (AC).
Classification of Hydro Power Turbines:
1. (Pelton turbine)-(Impulse turbine)-(High head & low quantity of water)-(10 to 35 rpm)
2. (Francis turbine)-(Reaction turbine)-(Medium head & Medium quantity of water)-(60 to
300rpm)
3. (Kaplan turbine)-(Reaction turbine)-(Low head & High quantity of water)-(120 to
1000rpm)
Wind turbine: It converts kinetic energy of wind into mechanical energy or electric energy (DC).
Classification of Hydro Power Turbines:
1. Small wind turbines: Less than 12 m in diameter and between 50 W and 50 KW outputs
power.
2. Medium wind turbines: Up to 40 m in diameter and up to 750 KW outputs power.
3. Large wind turbine: : Greater than 40 m in diameter and up to 5 MW outputs power
Steam turbine: It converts thermal energy of steam into mechanical energy.
Classification if steam Turbine:
1. Impulse turbine
2. Reaction turbine
3. Combination of Impulse and reaction
2.14 Hydraulic Fluids
It is used to transmit and control energy in a system.
Incompressible fluids like oils and water are used in hydraulic systems.
Function of Hydraulic fluids:
To transmit power
To lubricate moving parts
To seal gaps and cleaning parts
To dissipate heat causing friction
To prevent rust and corrosion
Types of hydraulic fluids:
1. Mineral oils
2. Oil in water
3. Water in oil
4. Water glycol
Desirable properties of hydraulic fluids:
1. Specific gravity: It is an important property for design of pump, reservoir, piping sizing and for
calculation of pressure at pump inlet.
2. Viscosity: Should have low enough viscosity for lubricate surface and for easy flow ability. Also
having enough viscosity for seal gaps and leakage.
3. Coefficient of thermal expansion: provision in the system design as pipe design, reservoir
design etc.
4. Flammability: Must be non- flammable and should have high flash point and fire point.
5. Gumming tendency: Should have minimum gumming tendency to avoid reduced in flow area.
6. Oxidation tendency: Should have minimum oxidation tendency to avoid changed in oil
characteristics.
7. Corrosion resistance: Should have high corrosion resistance to get longer life of the system.
2.15 Turbines
Hydro turbine: It converts potential energy of water into mechanical energy or electric energy (AC).
Classification of Hydro Power Turbines:
1. (Pelton turbine)-(Impulse turbine)-(High head & low quantity of water)-(10 to 35 rpm)
2. (Francis turbine)-(Reaction turbine)-(Medium head & Medium quantity of water)-(60 to
300rpm)
3. (Kaplan turbine)-(Reaction turbine)-(Low head & High quantity of water)-(120 to
1000rpm)
Wind turbine: It converts kinetic energy of wind into mechanical energy or electric energy (DC).
Classification of Hydro Power Turbines:
1. Small wind turbines: Less than 12 m in diameter and between 50 W and 50 KW outputs
power.
2. Medium wind turbines: Up to 40 m in diameter and up to 750 KW outputs power.
3. Large wind turbine: : Greater than 40 m in diameter and up to 5 MW outputs power
Steam turbine: It converts thermal energy of steam into mechanical energy.
Classification if steam Turbine:
1. Impulse turbine
2. Reaction turbine
3. Combination of Impulse and reaction
24
Blades of turbine:
1. Fixed blade (nozzle): It converts potential energy of
steam into kinetic energy.
2. Moving blade: It converts that kinetic energy into
mechanical energy.
2.16 Tube and Pipe Requirements
The piping system in steam power plant is divided into four categories:
1. Steam piping
2. Water piping
3. Blow-off piping
4. Others
Requirements of steam piping system
1. Maximum reliability
2. Should be of necessary size
3. Withstand high pressure
4. Withstand high temperature and expansion
5. Avoid large number of joints
Materials for tubes in condenser & feed water heater (FWH)
1. Wrought Iron: used for low and medium pressure range up to 250 psi (17 bar).
2. Alloy Steel: used for high temperature applications.
Chromium steel pipes used for temperature higher than 525
o
C to improves corrosion
resistance.
Molybdenum steel used for temperature between 400- 525
o
C to improves creep
strength.
Nickel is used to add toughness to the materials.
3. Copper and Brass: used for oil lines, but high in cost. The maximum pressure is limited to
20kg/cm
2
.
Properties of insulation of steam piping
1. Have high insulating efficiency
2. Not affected by moisture
3. Withstand high temperature
4. Have high strength
Blades of turbine:
1. Fixed blade (nozzle): It converts potential energy of
steam into kinetic energy.
2. Moving blade: It converts that kinetic energy into
mechanical energy.
2.16 Tube and Pipe Requirements
The piping system in steam power plant is divided into four categories:
1. Steam piping
2. Water piping
3. Blow-off piping
4. Others
Requirements of steam piping system
1. Maximum reliability
2. Should be of necessary size
3. Withstand high pressure
4. Withstand high temperature and expansion
5. Avoid large number of joints
Materials for tubes in condenser & feed water heater (FWH)
1. Wrought Iron: used for low and medium pressure range up to 250 psi (17 bar).
2. Alloy Steel: used for high temperature applications.
Chromium steel pipes used for temperature higher than 525
o
C to improves corrosion
resistance.
Molybdenum steel used for temperature between 400- 525
o
C to improves creep
strength.
Nickel is used to add toughness to the materials.
3. Copper and Brass: used for oil lines, but high in cost. The maximum pressure is limited to
20kg/cm
2
.
Properties of insulation of steam piping
1. Have high insulating efficiency
2. Not affected by moisture
3. Withstand high temperature
4. Have high strength
25
Types of piping joints: It is used to connect multiple pipes.
1. Threaded Joints: Pipes are connected by screwing with the help
of threads provided for each pipe. One pipe having internal
threads and the other one having external threads. They are
used for Cast iron pipes, copper pipes, PVC and G.I pipes. They
are used in low temperature areas and low pressure flows.
2. Brazed Joints: Jointing pipes using molten filler material at
above 840
o
C. They are used for joining copper pipes or copper
alloy pipes. Strength of brazed joint is low compared to other
joints. They are used in moderate range of temperature areas.
3. Soldered Joints: They are similar to brazing but the filler metal
melts at below 840
o
C. They are used to joint copper and
copper alloy pipes. They are used for low temperature areas.
They have low strength compared to brazed joints.
4. Welded Joints:
a) Butt Welded Joints: They are used for joining the pipes
that have the same diameter. They are used for large
commercials and industrial piping systems. They have
good strength and they can resist high pressure. They
are expensive and don't opened for maintenance.
b) Socket Welded Joints: They are used when there is a
high chance of leakage in joints. Pipes are connected as
putting one into other and welded around the joint.
They are used when Pipes having different diameters.
They have lower cost than butt welding.
5. Flanged Joints: They are used for high pressure flows and
for large diameter pipes. They are used for plain end pipes
or threaded pipes. Two flange components are connected
by bolts at the pipe joint to prevent leakage. They are made
of cast iron, steel etc. they are having good strength and
resist high pressure. They are also useful for repairing
pipelines and maintenance.
Types of piping joints: It is used to connect multiple pipes.
1. Threaded Joints: Pipes are connected by screwing with the help
of threads provided for each pipe. One pipe having internal
threads and the other one having external threads. They are
used for Cast iron pipes, copper pipes, PVC and G.I pipes. They
are used in low temperature areas and low pressure flows.
2. Brazed Joints: Jointing pipes using molten filler material at
above 840
o
C. They are used for joining copper pipes or copper
alloy pipes. Strength of brazed joint is low compared to other
joints. They are used in moderate range of temperature areas.
3. Soldered Joints: They are similar to brazing but the filler metal
melts at below 840
o
C. They are used to joint copper and
copper alloy pipes. They are used for low temperature areas.
They have low strength compared to brazed joints.
4. Welded Joints:
a) Butt Welded Joints: They are used for joining the pipes
that have the same diameter. They are used for large
commercials and industrial piping systems. They have
good strength and they can resist high pressure. They
are expensive and don't opened for maintenance.
b) Socket Welded Joints: They are used when there is a
high chance of leakage in joints. Pipes are connected as
putting one into other and welded around the joint.
They are used when Pipes having different diameters.
They have lower cost than butt welding.
5. Flanged Joints: They are used for high pressure flows and
for large diameter pipes. They are used for plain end pipes
or threaded pipes. Two flange components are connected
by bolts at the pipe joint to prevent leakage. They are made
of cast iron, steel etc. they are having good strength and
resist high pressure. They are also useful for repairing
pipelines and maintenance.
26
6. Compression Joints: When the pipes have plain ends, they
are joined by installing threaded fittings or couplings fittings
at their ends. They can connect pipes of different materials
and different sizes. Compression fittings are available in
different materials and selection of fittings may depend
upon our requirement.
7. Grooved Joints: The pipe ends consist grooved edges which
are connected by elastomer seal and then ductile iron made
grooved couplings are used as lock for elastomer seal. These
grooved couplings are connected by bolts. These joints are
easy to install and economical. They have good resistance
against pressure and they are used in moderate temperature
areas. They are easily removable so, they are easily for
maintenance.
6. Compression Joints: When the pipes have plain ends, they
are joined by installing threaded fittings or couplings fittings
at their ends. They can connect pipes of different materials
and different sizes. Compression fittings are available in
different materials and selection of fittings may depend
upon our requirement.
7. Grooved Joints: The pipe ends consist grooved edges which
are connected by elastomer seal and then ductile iron made
grooved couplings are used as lock for elastomer seal. These
grooved couplings are connected by bolts. These joints are
easy to install and economical. They have good resistance
against pressure and they are used in moderate temperature
areas. They are easily removable so, they are easily for
maintenance.
27
28
3.1 Concept of Heat
Temperature:
Temperature is the measure of hotness or coldness of an object.
A temperature measured in kelvin (K) is called absolute temperature.
Absolute zero (or 0K) is the temperature at which the pressure of gas becomes zero. 0 K = -
273.15 °C
Melting Point: The temperature at which a substance changes from solid phase to liquid phase
Boiling Point: The temperature at which a substance changes from liquid phase to gas phase.
Light resulting from temperature is called blackbody radiation, and ranges:
Red -1000 K
Orange/Yellow -3000 K
White or light Blue -5000 K
Types of Flame:
1. Laminar, Premixed: fuel and air are mixed before the combustion. The flow is smooth.
Example: Bunsen burner flame.
2. Laminar, Diffusion: The fuel comes from the wax vapor and air mix after diffusion into
the flame. Example: candle.
3. Turbulent, Premixed: air and fuel are premixed in burner like boiler or furnace.
4. Turbulent, Diffusion: It is the most unwanted fires .no burner or other mechanical
device for mixing fuel and air.
Combustion Requirements: the combustion required three elements for combustion and if
one of these three elements is removed, the combustion will stop.
1. Fuel
2. Heat (ignition)
3. Air
Example: Find the equivalent temperature on the indicated scale: (a) –273.15 °C on the
Fahrenheit scale, (b) 98.6°F on the Celsius scale, and (c) 100 K on the Celsius scale and
Fahrenheit scale.
Sol: (a) ∵ 1 8 32 F . C ⇒°F = 1.8 X (–273.15) + 32 = – 459.67 ⇒ – 273.15 °C = – 459.67 °F.
S. No. Quantity SI Unit Conventional Unit
Conversion
Formula
Freezing/ Boiling
point of water
1 Temperature kelvin (K)
degree Celsius (°C),
degree Fahrenheit (°F)
32°C1.8°F
273.15°CK
Scale Freeze Boil
C 0°C 100°C
K 273K 32°F
F 373K 212°F
2 Heat joule (J) calorie (cal) 1 cal = 4.186 J
3 Pressure pascal (Pa) atmosphere (atm) 1 atm = 10
5
Pa
4 Volume cubic metre (m
3
) litre (l) 1 l = 10
-3
m
3
5 Specific Heat Capacity J/kg.K J/kg.°C, cal/kg.°C
6 Latent Heat J/kg cal/kg
3.1 Concept of Heat
Temperature:
Temperature is the measure of hotness or coldness of an object.
A temperature measured in kelvin (K) is called absolute temperature.
Absolute zero (or 0K) is the temperature at which the pressure of gas becomes zero. 0 K = -
273.15 °C
Melting Point: The temperature at which a substance changes from solid phase to liquid phase
Boiling Point: The temperature at which a substance changes from liquid phase to gas phase.
Light resulting from temperature is called blackbody radiation, and ranges:
Red -1000 K
Orange/Yellow -3000 K
White or light Blue -5000 K
Types of Flame:
1. Laminar, Premixed: fuel and air are mixed before the combustion. The flow is smooth.
Example: Bunsen burner flame.
2. Laminar, Diffusion: The fuel comes from the wax vapor and air mix after diffusion into
the flame. Example: candle.
3. Turbulent, Premixed: air and fuel are premixed in burner like boiler or furnace.
4. Turbulent, Diffusion: It is the most unwanted fires .no burner or other mechanical
device for mixing fuel and air.
Combustion Requirements: the combustion required three elements for combustion and if
one of these three elements is removed, the combustion will stop.
1. Fuel
2. Heat (ignition)
3. Air
Example: Find the equivalent temperature on the indicated scale: (a) –273.15 °C on the
Fahrenheit scale, (b) 98.6°F on the Celsius scale, and (c) 100 K on the Celsius scale and
Fahrenheit scale.
Sol: (a) ∵ 1 8 32 F . C ⇒°F = 1.8 X (–273.15) + 32 = – 459.67 ⇒ – 273.15 °C = – 459.67 °F.
S. No. Quantity SI Unit Conventional Unit
Conversion
Formula
Freezing/ Boiling
point of water
1 Temperature kelvin (K)
degree Celsius (°C),
degree Fahrenheit (°F)
32°C1.8°F
273.15°CK
Scale Freeze Boil
C 0°C 100°C
K 273K 32°F
F 373K 212°F
2 Heat joule (J) calorie (cal) 1 cal = 4.186 J
3 Pressure pascal (Pa) atmosphere (atm) 1 atm = 10
5
Pa
4 Volume cubic metre (m
3
) litre (l) 1 l = 10
-3
m
3
5 Specific Heat Capacity J/kg.K J/kg.°C, cal/kg.°C
6 Latent Heat J/kg cal/kg
29
(b) ∵ 1 8 32 F . C ⇒ 32
18
F-
C
. ⇒98.6 - 32
°C =
1.8 = 37 ⇒ 98.6°F = 37 °C.
(c) 273 15 K C .
⇒273 15C K - . ⇒°C =100 - 273.15 = - 173.15 ⇒ 100 K = –173.15 °C.
and 1 8 32 F . C ⇒°F = 1.8 X (–173.15) + 32 = – 279.67 ⇒ 100 K = – 279.67 °F.
Specific Heat or Specific Heat Capacity in Gases, liquids and solids
It is the energy required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of
a substance by one degree.
Specific Heat depends on material of the object and doesn't
depend on its mass.
Specific heat at constant volume "Cv" and specific heat at constant
pressure "Cp"
Cp is greater than Cv because at constant pressure the system is
allowed to expand and required energy.
Meyer's Equation: �
�−�
�=�
Unit:
��
��
.°�
Amount of heat needed to change temperature of an object is
�=� � ∆� ,Here, m = mass of object, C = Specific Heat,
T = change in temperature = Tf – Ti
Example: Calculate the specific heat of copper if 1935 J of heat increases the temperature of
1kg of copper by 5°C.
Sol: Here Q = 1935 J, m= 1kg, T = 5°C. ∵ Q = mCT ⇒ oQ 1935
C = = = 387 J/kg. C
mΔT 1X 5
Heat
The energy that flows between objects due to their temperature difference is called Heat.
Each molecule (or atom) of an object has kinetic energy (KE) and potential energy (PE).
Internal energy (U) of an object is the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy of all the
molecules (or atoms) of the object. �=(??????�+��)
��� ���������
If two objects are in thermal contact but no net flow of heat is between them then they are in
thermal equilibrium Temperature of the two objects is same.
If an object takes heat, its internal energy increases; if an object gives heat, its internal
energy decreases.
If due to transfer of heat the potential energy of the molecules changes by definite amount
then phase of the object changes.
If due to transfer of heat the kinetic energy of the molecules changes then temperature of
the object changes.
1 calorie is the heat energy that can raise the temperature of 1g of water by 1
0
C.
Principle of Calorimetry: If a cold body is put in thermal contact with a hot body then at thermal
equilibrium.
Heat gained by cold body = Heat lost by hot body.
�
�=−�
�
�
��
�(�
�−�
�)=−�
��
�(�
�−�
�)
Here, mc=mass of cold body, Cc=specific heat of cold body, Tc=temperature of cold body,
mh=mass of hot body, Ch=specific heat of hot body, Th=temperature of hot body and
TE=equilibrium temperature.
(b) ∵ 1 8 32 F . C ⇒ 32
18
F-
C
. ⇒98.6 - 32
°C =
1.8 = 37 ⇒ 98.6°F = 37 °C.
(c) 273 15 K C .
⇒273 15C K - . ⇒°C =100 - 273.15 = - 173.15 ⇒ 100 K = –173.15 °C.
and 1 8 32 F . C ⇒°F = 1.8 X (–173.15) + 32 = – 279.67 ⇒ 100 K = – 279.67 °F.
Specific Heat or Specific Heat Capacity in Gases, liquids and solids
It is the energy required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of
a substance by one degree.
Specific Heat depends on material of the object and doesn't
depend on its mass.
Specific heat at constant volume "Cv" and specific heat at constant
pressure "Cp"
Cp is greater than Cv because at constant pressure the system is
allowed to expand and required energy.
Meyer's Equation: �
�−�
�=�
Unit:
��
��
.°�
Amount of heat needed to change temperature of an object is
�=� � ∆� ,Here, m = mass of object, C = Specific Heat,
T = change in temperature = Tf – Ti
Example: Calculate the specific heat of copper if 1935 J of heat increases the temperature of
1kg of copper by 5°C.
Sol: Here Q = 1935 J, m= 1kg, T = 5°C. ∵ Q = mCT ⇒ oQ 1935
C = = = 387 J/kg. C
mΔT 1X 5
Heat
The energy that flows between objects due to their temperature difference is called Heat.
Each molecule (or atom) of an object has kinetic energy (KE) and potential energy (PE).
Internal energy (U) of an object is the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy of all the
molecules (or atoms) of the object. �=(??????�+��)
��� ���������
If two objects are in thermal contact but no net flow of heat is between them then they are in
thermal equilibrium Temperature of the two objects is same.
If an object takes heat, its internal energy increases; if an object gives heat, its internal
energy decreases.
If due to transfer of heat the potential energy of the molecules changes by definite amount
then phase of the object changes.
If due to transfer of heat the kinetic energy of the molecules changes then temperature of
the object changes.
1 calorie is the heat energy that can raise the temperature of 1g of water by 1
0
C.
Principle of Calorimetry: If a cold body is put in thermal contact with a hot body then at thermal
equilibrium.
Heat gained by cold body = Heat lost by hot body.
�
�=−�
�
�
��
�(�
�−�
�)=−�
��
�(�
�−�
�)
Here, mc=mass of cold body, Cc=specific heat of cold body, Tc=temperature of cold body,
mh=mass of hot body, Ch=specific heat of hot body, Th=temperature of hot body and
TE=equilibrium temperature.
30
Example: Temperature of 0.05 kg of iron is raised to 200 °C and then dropped into a
calorimeter containing 0.35kg of water at 20 °C. If the final temperature is 22.4 °C, find specific
heat capacity of iron.
Sol: Here iron is hot body and water is cold body
⇒ mc = 0.35 kg, Cc = 4186 J/kg.°C, Tc = 20 °C, mh = 0.05 kg, Ch = ?, Th = 200°C and TE = 22.4 °C.
∵ mcCc(TE –Tc) = – mhCh(TE –Th) ⇒ D
oQ 1935
C = = = 387 J / kg. C
m T 1X 5 (Ans: 395.97J/kgC)
Phase Change:
Change of a solid into liquid (melting), change of a liquid into solid (fusion), change of a liquid
into gas (vaporization), and change of a gas into liquid (condensation) are the instances of
phase change.
Example:
In a phase change, only the potential energy of the molecules changes (and there is no
change in kinetic energy of the molecules or temperature of the object).
Latent Heat (L):
Latent Heat is the amount of heat that changes the phase of 1kg of a substance without
changing its temperature.
Heat required for phase change is
Where m = mass of the object and L = latent heat of the substance.
Latent heat of fusion (Lf) is the heat energy associated with melting or fusion.
Latent heat of vaporization (Lv) is the heat energy associated with boiling or condensation.
Ice Water
+ Q
f
– Q
f – Q
v
+ Q
v
Water Steam
Liquid Gas
Q = + mLv
Q = – mLv
Solid Liquid
Q = + mLf
Q = – mLf
If change in temperature ⇒Q = mCT
+ if T = + (when object takes heat)
– if T = – (when object gives heat)
If change in phase ⇒Q = mL
+ if change is from solid to liquid or from liquid to gas
– if change is from liquid to solid or from gas to liquid
Q = m L
Example: Temperature of 0.05 kg of iron is raised to 200 °C and then dropped into a
calorimeter containing 0.35kg of water at 20 °C. If the final temperature is 22.4 °C, find specific
heat capacity of iron.
Sol: Here iron is hot body and water is cold body
⇒ mc = 0.35 kg, Cc = 4186 J/kg.°C, Tc = 20 °C, mh = 0.05 kg, Ch = ?, Th = 200°C and TE = 22.4 °C.
∵ mcCc(TE –Tc) = – mhCh(TE –Th) ⇒ D
oQ 1935
C = = = 387 J / kg. C
m T 1X 5 (Ans: 395.97J/kgC)
Phase Change:
Change of a solid into liquid (melting), change of a liquid into solid (fusion), change of a liquid
into gas (vaporization), and change of a gas into liquid (condensation) are the instances of
phase change.
Example:
In a phase change, only the potential energy of the molecules changes (and there is no
change in kinetic energy of the molecules or temperature of the object).
Latent Heat (L):
Latent Heat is the amount of heat that changes the phase of 1kg of a substance without
changing its temperature.
Heat required for phase change is
Where m = mass of the object and L = latent heat of the substance.
Latent heat of fusion (Lf) is the heat energy associated with melting or fusion.
Latent heat of vaporization (Lv) is the heat energy associated with boiling or condensation.
Ice Water
+ Q
f
– Q
f – Q
v
+ Q
v
Water Steam
Liquid Gas
Q = + mLv
Q = – mLv
Solid Liquid
Q = + mLf
Q = – mLf
If change in temperature ⇒Q = mCT
+ if T = + (when object takes heat)
– if T = – (when object gives heat)
If change in phase ⇒Q = mL
+ if change is from solid to liquid or from liquid to gas
– if change is from liquid to solid or from gas to liquid
Q = m L
31
3.2 heat Transfer
Heat transfer
It is study of thermal energy transfer causing a temperature difference or gradient.
Energy can transfer from or to a given mass by two mechanisms: heat Q and work W.
The energy interaction is heat transfer if its driving force is temperature difference, otherwise
it's work.
A rising piston, a rotating shaft, and an electrical wire crossing are all associated with work
interactions.
Total Heat transfer (Q): �=��
���∆T � rate of heat transfer (�̇): �̇=
�
∆�
��⁄ �� �
Thermodynamics Vs Heat transfer
Thermodynamics tells about
How much heat is transferred
How much work is done
Final state of the system
Heat transfer tells about
How heat is transferred
At what heat is transferred
Temperature distribution inside the body
Driving forces
The driving force for heat transfer is the temperature difference.
The driving force for electric current flow is the voltage difference.
The driving force for fluid flow is the pressure difference.
Energy transfer
Energy can transferred from or to a given mass by two mechanisms: heat Q and work W .
The energy interaction is heat transfer if its driving force is a temperature difference,
otherwise it's work
A rising piston, a rotating shaft, and an electrical wire crossing are all associated with work
interactions.
Heat Flex
It is the heat transfer per unit time per unit area.
�=
�̇
�
�/�
2
Methods of heat transfer
1. Conduction:
It is the heat transfer from one substance to another by direct contact.
Fourier's law of heat conduction:
�̇
����������=��
�
�−�
�
∆�
=−��
∆�
∆�
=−��
��
��
����
K (Thermal conductivity):
a) It is the rate of heat transfer per unit area per unit temperature difference.
�/� °�
b) High thermal conductivity means that the substance has good conductor and
vice versa
c) Thermal conductivity of substance depends on the chemical composition,
phase (liquids is more than the gasses and the metals have the highest),
crystalline structure (if solid), temperature (K of the metal decreases when
temperature increased and decreased in fluid), pressure, and homogeneity.
d) Thermal conductivity is affected by the phase change.
A (Area): Heat transfer increased when the area increases and vice versa.
��
��
(Temperature gradient): Heat transfer increased when the temperature gradient
increases.
∆� (Thickness): Heat transfer decreased when the thickness decreases and vice versa.
3.2 heat Transfer
Heat transfer
It is study of thermal energy transfer causing a temperature difference or gradient.
Energy can transfer from or to a given mass by two mechanisms: heat Q and work W.
The energy interaction is heat transfer if its driving force is temperature difference, otherwise
it's work.
A rising piston, a rotating shaft, and an electrical wire crossing are all associated with work
interactions.
Total Heat transfer (Q): �=��
���∆T � rate of heat transfer (�̇): �̇=
�
∆�
��⁄ �� �
Thermodynamics Vs Heat transfer
Thermodynamics tells about
How much heat is transferred
How much work is done
Final state of the system
Heat transfer tells about
How heat is transferred
At what heat is transferred
Temperature distribution inside the body
Driving forces
The driving force for heat transfer is the temperature difference.
The driving force for electric current flow is the voltage difference.
The driving force for fluid flow is the pressure difference.
Energy transfer
Energy can transferred from or to a given mass by two mechanisms: heat Q and work W .
The energy interaction is heat transfer if its driving force is a temperature difference,
otherwise it's work
A rising piston, a rotating shaft, and an electrical wire crossing are all associated with work
interactions.
Heat Flex
It is the heat transfer per unit time per unit area.
�=
�̇
�
�/�
2
Methods of heat transfer
1. Conduction:
It is the heat transfer from one substance to another by direct contact.
Fourier's law of heat conduction:
�̇
����������=��
�
�−�
�
∆�
=−��
∆�
∆�
=−��
��
��
����
K (Thermal conductivity):
a) It is the rate of heat transfer per unit area per unit temperature difference.
�/� °�
b) High thermal conductivity means that the substance has good conductor and
vice versa
c) Thermal conductivity of substance depends on the chemical composition,
phase (liquids is more than the gasses and the metals have the highest),
crystalline structure (if solid), temperature (K of the metal decreases when
temperature increased and decreased in fluid), pressure, and homogeneity.
d) Thermal conductivity is affected by the phase change.
A (Area): Heat transfer increased when the area increases and vice versa.
��
��
(Temperature gradient): Heat transfer increased when the temperature gradient
increases.
∆� (Thickness): Heat transfer decreased when the thickness decreases and vice versa.
32
Thermal diffusivity (??????):
a) It is the ratio of thermal conductivity to the heat stored. Heat stored is the
product ρ�
�
b) ??????=
�
��
�
, k is thermal conductivity, ρ is the density, and Cp is specific heat.
c) Materials with high thermal conductivity or low heat stored will have large ??????.
2. Convection:
It is the heat transfer within a fluid caused molecular motion or between solid surface
and moving fluid.
Newton's law of cooling: �̇
����������=��
�(�
�−�
∞) ����
h is the convection heat transfer coefficient, As is the surface area, Ts is the surface
temperature, �
∞is the temperature of the fluid that far from the surface.
Forced convection: The fluid forced to flow by external force like a fan, pump, or wind.
Natural (or free) convection: The fluid motion is caused by temperature difference.
Internal convection: The fluid flow in a pipe or channel.
External convection: The fluid flow over a surface.
3. Radiation:
It is the heat transfer between two substances that are not in contact.
Stefan-Boltzmann law: the emissivity of blackbody is directly proportional to the fourth
power of absolute temperature.
�̇
���������=????????????�
�(�
�
�
−�
∞
�
) ���� .Stefan-Boltzmann constant ??????=5.67×
10
−8
�/�
2
�
4
,
As is the surface area, T
s is the absolute temperature, ?????? is the emissivity.
Blackbody: The idealized surface that emits radiation at this maximum rate, and the
radiation emitted by a blackbody is called blackbody radiation. For blackbody
??????=1,??????=0,�=0
Properties of Radiation:
a) Emissivity (??????) is the ratio of the radiation emitted by a surface to the
radiation emitted by a blackbody at the same temperature.
b) Absorptivity (??????) is the fraction of radiation absorbed by a surface.
??????=
�
��������
�
��������
c) Reflectivity (�) is the fraction reflected by the surface. ??????=
�
���������
�
��������
d) Transmissivity (??????) is the fraction transmitted by the surface. ??????=
�
�����������
�
��������
??????+�+??????=�
The Kirchhoff's law of radiation: The emissivity and the absorptivity of a surface are
equal at the same temperature and wavelength. ??????
�=??????
�; ??????
�=??????
�……
Heat generation
It is conversion of electrical, nuclear, or chemical energy into heat or thermal energy.
�̇=�̇� �� �� ����, �̇ is the constant rate of heat generation per unit volume
(W/m
3
), V is the volume, ?????? is the current, and V is the voltage.
Thermal diffusivity (??????):
a) It is the ratio of thermal conductivity to the heat stored. Heat stored is the
product ρ�
�
b) ??????=
�
��
�
, k is thermal conductivity, ρ is the density, and Cp is specific heat.
c) Materials with high thermal conductivity or low heat stored will have large ??????.
2. Convection:
It is the heat transfer within a fluid caused molecular motion or between solid surface
and moving fluid.
Newton's law of cooling: �̇
����������=��
�(�
�−�
∞) ����
h is the convection heat transfer coefficient, As is the surface area, Ts is the surface
temperature, �
∞is the temperature of the fluid that far from the surface.
Forced convection: The fluid forced to flow by external force like a fan, pump, or wind.
Natural (or free) convection: The fluid motion is caused by temperature difference.
Internal convection: The fluid flow in a pipe or channel.
External convection: The fluid flow over a surface.
3. Radiation:
It is the heat transfer between two substances that are not in contact.
Stefan-Boltzmann law: the emissivity of blackbody is directly proportional to the fourth
power of absolute temperature.
�̇
���������=????????????�
�(�
�
�
−�
∞
�
) ���� .Stefan-Boltzmann constant ??????=5.67×
10
−8
�/�
2
�
4
,
As is the surface area, T
s is the absolute temperature, ?????? is the emissivity.
Blackbody: The idealized surface that emits radiation at this maximum rate, and the
radiation emitted by a blackbody is called blackbody radiation. For blackbody
??????=1,??????=0,�=0
Properties of Radiation:
a) Emissivity (??????) is the ratio of the radiation emitted by a surface to the
radiation emitted by a blackbody at the same temperature.
b) Absorptivity (??????) is the fraction of radiation absorbed by a surface.
??????=
�
��������
�
��������
c) Reflectivity (�) is the fraction reflected by the surface. ??????=
�
���������
�
��������
d) Transmissivity (??????) is the fraction transmitted by the surface. ??????=
�
�����������
�
��������
??????+�+??????=�
The Kirchhoff's law of radiation: The emissivity and the absorptivity of a surface are
equal at the same temperature and wavelength. ??????
�=??????
�; ??????
�=??????
�……
Heat generation
It is conversion of electrical, nuclear, or chemical energy into heat or thermal energy.
�̇=�̇� �� �� ����, �̇ is the constant rate of heat generation per unit volume
(W/m
3
), V is the volume, ?????? is the current, and V is the voltage.
33
34
4.1 Newton's Laws – Kinematics – Kinetics
Mechanics of Machines: It's study of motion and forces between various parts of a machine.
Machine: It's a device which receives energy from some sources and uses it to do some useful
work
Sub-divisions of mechanics of machines:
a) Kinematics: It studies of motion between various parts of a machine without studies of force.
b) Dynamics: It studies of forces of the moving parts of machines.
c) Kinetics: It studies of inertia forces come from both mass and motion of moving parts of
machines.
d) Statics: It studies of forces of the rest parts of machines.
Basics of SI units: Prefixes used in SI units some conversion of units
Newton's Laws of motion:
Newton's first law: everybody continuous of rest or motion until acted by external force.
Newton's second law: The rate of change in momentum (Force) is directly proportional to the
acceleration. �=(��−��)�⁄=�(�−��⁄)=��
Newton's third law: To every action there is always an equal and opposite reaction.
Plane motion: The motion of body moves to only one plane.
Types of plane motion:
1. Rectilinear motion: When a body is moving in straight line path.
2. Curvilinear motion: When a body is moving along curved path.
Linear velocity: It is the rate of change of linear displacement to the time. �=
��
��
�/�
Linear Acceleration: It is the rate of change of linear velocity to the time. �=
��
��
=
�
2
�
��
2
�/�
2
Equation of linear motion:
�=�+��
�=��+
1
2
⁄��
2
�
2
=�
2
+2��
�=((�+�)�))⁄(2)=�
���
v Velocity m/s
a Acceleration m/s
2
s Displacement m
ω Angular velocity Rad/s
∝ Angular acceleration Rad/s
2
θ Angular displacement rad
ρ Density Kg/m
3
F,W Force, weight Kg.m/s
2
or N
p Pressure N/m
2
or Pa
W,E,
M, T
Work, Energy, Moment
of Force, Torque
N.m or J
P Power J/s or Watt
M Mass kg
P Momentum Kg.m/s
Ι Moment of Inertia Kg.m
2
?????? Electric charge coulomb (C)
V Electric Voltage volt (v)
I Electric Current ampere (A)
R Electric Resistance Ohm (Ω)
C Electric Capacitance farad (F)
B Magnetic field tesla (T)
L Inductance henry (H)
ʄ Frequency Hertz (H
z)
Power Prefix symbol
10
-24
yocto y
10
-21
zepto z
10
-18
atto a
10
-15
femto f
10
-12
pico- P
10
-9
nano- N
10
-6
micro- Μ
10
-3
milli- M
10
-2
centi- C
10
-1
deci- D
10
1
deka- da
10
3
kilo- K
10
6
mega- M
10
9
giga- G
10
12
tera- T
10
15
peta P
10
18
exa E
10
21
zetta Z
10
24
yotto Y
1 kg 2.2 Pounds
1 kg 35.27 Ounces
1 foot 30.5 cm
1 foot 12 inch
1 inch 2.54 cm
1 mile 1.61 Km
1 calories 1.026 Pound
1 knot 6068 feet
1 league 3 knot
1 yard 36 inch
1 yard 3 feet
1 decimeter 10 cm
1 gallon 3.8 liters
1 oil barrels 42 gallons
1 fluid barrels 31.5 gallons
1 tons 1000 kg
1 tons 7.3 oil barrels
1 acre 4200 m
2
1 hectare 100,000 m
2
1 century 10 years
4.1 Newton's Laws – Kinematics – Kinetics
Mechanics of Machines: It's study of motion and forces between various parts of a machine.
Machine: It's a device which receives energy from some sources and uses it to do some useful
work
Sub-divisions of mechanics of machines:
a) Kinematics: It studies of motion between various parts of a machine without studies of force.
b) Dynamics: It studies of forces of the moving parts of machines.
c) Kinetics: It studies of inertia forces come from both mass and motion of moving parts of
machines.
d) Statics: It studies of forces of the rest parts of machines.
Basics of SI units: Prefixes used in SI units some conversion of units
Newton's Laws of motion:
Newton's first law: everybody continuous of rest or motion until acted by external force.
Newton's second law: The rate of change in momentum (Force) is directly proportional to the
acceleration. �=(��−��)�⁄=�(�−��⁄)=��
Newton's third law: To every action there is always an equal and opposite reaction.
Plane motion: The motion of body moves to only one plane.
Types of plane motion:
1. Rectilinear motion: When a body is moving in straight line path.
2. Curvilinear motion: When a body is moving along curved path.
Linear velocity: It is the rate of change of linear displacement to the time. �=
��
��
�/�
Linear Acceleration: It is the rate of change of linear velocity to the time. �=
��
��
=
�
2
�
��
2
�/�
2
Equation of linear motion:
�=�+��
�=��+
1
2
⁄��
2
�
2
=�
2
+2��
�=((�+�)�))⁄(2)=�
���
v Velocity m/s
a Acceleration m/s
2
s Displacement m
ω Angular velocity Rad/s
∝ Angular acceleration Rad/s
2
θ Angular displacement rad
ρ Density Kg/m
3
F,W Force, weight Kg.m/s
2
or N
p Pressure N/m
2
or Pa
W,E,
M, T
Work, Energy, Moment
of Force, Torque
N.m or J
P Power J/s or Watt
M Mass kg
P Momentum Kg.m/s
Ι Moment of Inertia Kg.m
2
?????? Electric charge coulomb (C)
V Electric Voltage volt (v)
I Electric Current ampere (A)
R Electric Resistance Ohm (Ω)
C Electric Capacitance farad (F)
B Magnetic field tesla (T)
L Inductance henry (H)
ʄ Frequency Hertz (H
z)
Power Prefix symbol
10
-24
yocto y
10
-21
zepto z
10
-18
atto a
10
-15
femto f
10
-12
pico- P
10
-9
nano- N
10
-6
micro- Μ
10
-3
milli- M
10
-2
centi- C
10
-1
deci- D
10
1
deka- da
10
3
kilo- K
10
6
mega- M
10
9
giga- G
10
12
tera- T
10
15
peta P
10
18
exa E
10
21
zetta Z
10
24
yotto Y
1 kg 2.2 Pounds
1 kg 35.27 Ounces
1 foot 30.5 cm
1 foot 12 inch
1 inch 2.54 cm
1 mile 1.61 Km
1 calories 1.026 Pound
1 knot 6068 feet
1 league 3 knot
1 yard 36 inch
1 yard 3 feet
1 decimeter 10 cm
1 gallon 3.8 liters
1 oil barrels 42 gallons
1 fluid barrels 31.5 gallons
1 tons 1000 kg
1 tons 7.3 oil barrels
1 acre 4200 m
2
1 hectare 100,000 m
2
1 century 10 years
35
Angular velocity: It is the rate of change of angular displacement to the time. ??????=
�??????
��
����⁄
Angular acceleration: It is the rate of change of linear velocity to the time. ??????=
�??????
��
=
�
2
??????
��
2
���/�
2
Equation of angular motion:
??????=??????
0+??????�
�=??????
0�+
1
2
⁄??????�
2
??????
2
=??????
0
2
+2??????�
�=((??????
0+??????)�))⁄(2)=??????
���
If a body is rotating at the speed of N r.p.m. (revolutions per minute), then ??????=2��60 ���/�⁄
Relationship between Linear and Angular motion:
Linear velocity: �=�.?????? �/�
Linear acceleration: �=�.?????? �/�
2
Acceleration of a particle along a circular path: When a particle moves along a circular path, it has two
components of acceleration.
1. Tangential component: �
�=�.?????? �/�
2
2. Normal component: �
�=??????
2
.� �/�
2
Total acceleration: �=√(�
�
2
+�
�
2
)
Inclination between acceleration: ����=�
��
�⁄
Oscillatory motion of a particle:
Simple Harmonic Motion (S.H.M): It is a to and fro motion. In S.H.M, the acceleration
is directly proportional to its distance. Ex of S.H.M: oscillations of a pendulum,
motion of piston in an engine cylinder.
Oscillation: a body moves to and fro motion from mean position to one end position,
then to the other end position and back to the mean position.
Amplitude: Maximum displacement of the body from its mean position.
Time Period: Time taken to complete one oscillation. �=��/??????
Frequency: Number of oscillations per second. �=
�
�
Mass: It is the amount of matter contained in a body. It doesn’t change when positions change.
Weight: It is the product of mass & gravity acceleration. It changes when positions change. �=�� �
Momentum: it is the product of mass and velocity of a body. ��������=�� ��.
�
�
Law of conservation of momentum: Total momentum remains same if no external force acts.
Initial momentum = final momentum �
1�
1+�
2�
2+⋯=�
1�
1+�
2�
2+⋯
Impulse: It is the product of force and time. Impulse =�� �� �∆� �.�
Force: It is the rate of change in momentum. �=�� ��.�/�
2
Concurrent force: Two or more forces are action intersect at the same point. Ex: Pull Rope
Non-concurrent force: Two or more forces have equal magnitudes, but act in opposite
direction. Ex: Couple.
Moment of Force: It is the product of force and perpendicular distance. �=�� �.� �� �
Couple: Two equal and opposite forces form a couple. ������ �� ������=��
Centripetal and Centrifugal Forces: If a particle moves in a circular path, there are two forces keeping
the particle in path.
1. Centrifugal force acts outwards:�=�??????
2
� , r = radius, m = mass, ω = angular velocity
Angular velocity: It is the rate of change of angular displacement to the time. ??????=
�??????
��
����⁄
Angular acceleration: It is the rate of change of linear velocity to the time. ??????=
�??????
��
=
�
2
??????
��
2
���/�
2
Equation of angular motion:
??????=??????
0+??????�
�=??????
0�+
1
2
⁄??????�
2
??????
2
=??????
0
2
+2??????�
�=((??????
0+??????)�))⁄(2)=??????
���
If a body is rotating at the speed of N r.p.m. (revolutions per minute), then ??????=2��60 ���/�⁄
Relationship between Linear and Angular motion:
Linear velocity: �=�.?????? �/�
Linear acceleration: �=�.?????? �/�
2
Acceleration of a particle along a circular path: When a particle moves along a circular path, it has two
components of acceleration.
1. Tangential component: �
�=�.?????? �/�
2
2. Normal component: �
�=??????
2
.� �/�
2
Total acceleration: �=√(�
�
2
+�
�
2
)
Inclination between acceleration: ����=�
��
�⁄
Oscillatory motion of a particle:
Simple Harmonic Motion (S.H.M): It is a to and fro motion. In S.H.M, the acceleration
is directly proportional to its distance. Ex of S.H.M: oscillations of a pendulum,
motion of piston in an engine cylinder.
Oscillation: a body moves to and fro motion from mean position to one end position,
then to the other end position and back to the mean position.
Amplitude: Maximum displacement of the body from its mean position.
Time Period: Time taken to complete one oscillation. �=��/??????
Frequency: Number of oscillations per second. �=
�
�
Mass: It is the amount of matter contained in a body. It doesn’t change when positions change.
Weight: It is the product of mass & gravity acceleration. It changes when positions change. �=�� �
Momentum: it is the product of mass and velocity of a body. ��������=�� ��.
�
�
Law of conservation of momentum: Total momentum remains same if no external force acts.
Initial momentum = final momentum �
1�
1+�
2�
2+⋯=�
1�
1+�
2�
2+⋯
Impulse: It is the product of force and time. Impulse =�� �� �∆� �.�
Force: It is the rate of change in momentum. �=�� ��.�/�
2
Concurrent force: Two or more forces are action intersect at the same point. Ex: Pull Rope
Non-concurrent force: Two or more forces have equal magnitudes, but act in opposite
direction. Ex: Couple.
Moment of Force: It is the product of force and perpendicular distance. �=�� �.� �� �
Couple: Two equal and opposite forces form a couple. ������ �� ������=��
Centripetal and Centrifugal Forces: If a particle moves in a circular path, there are two forces keeping
the particle in path.
1. Centrifugal force acts outwards:�=�??????
2
� , r = radius, m = mass, ω = angular velocity
36
2. Centripetal force acts inwards: �=�
�
2
�
,
�
2
�
= centripetal acceleration
Moment of Inertia: It is the product of mass & square of the perpendicular distance. �=��
2
��.�
2
k=radius of gyration
Torque: It is the moment of force. It is the product of force and perpendicular distance.
�=�.� �.� �� � For rotation bodies: �=�.?????? �.� �� �
Work: It is the product of force and displacement.
�=�.� �.� �� � For rotation bodies: �=�.� �.� �� �
Work done on moving a body is equal to its change in Kinetic Energy (∆K.E).
Work done on lifting a body is equal to its change in Potential Energy (∆P.E).
Power: It is the rate of doing work or work done per unit time.
�=
���� ����
����
=
�
�
��⁄ �� ���� (1 hp=746 W), For rotation bodies: �=�.?????? ��⁄ �� ����
Energy: It is the capacity to do work. There are different forms of energy like mechanical energy,
electrical energy, chemical energy, heat energy, light energy, wind energy, etc.
Law of energy conservation: Total energy in the universe is constant. ��+��=��������
Or energy cannot be created or destroyed but it can be converted from one form to other.
Potential Energy: It is the energy due to the position of the body. �.�=��ℎ �.� �� �
Strain Energy: It is the energy due to deformed of the body.
�.�=
1
2
⁄ ��
2
�.� �� � , S=Stiffness in N/m, x= distance in m
Kinetic Energy: It is the energy due to motion of the body.
�.�=
1
2
⁄��
2
�.� �� � For rotation bodies: �.�=
1
2
⁄�??????
2
�.� �� �
Efficiency of a Machine: It is the ratio of output power to the input power. ƞ=
������
�����
�� ��??????�
4.2 Concepts of Mechanisms
Machines are devices which use energy to do some useful work.
Machines are made using parts or bodies or links.
Machines use mechanisms to get the required motion.
Kinematic Link or Element: It is a part of machine which has relative motion and resistant body.
Resistant body: It is transmission the required motion with negligible deformation.
Types of Links:
1. Rigid Link: It is a link or a body which can transmit motion with no deformation. Ex: Connecting
rod or Crank.
2. Flexible Link: It is a link or a body which can transmit motion with partly deformation. Ex: Belt,
Rope, Chain.
3. Fluid Link: The transmission of motion takes place though fluid under pressure. Ex: Hydraulic
presses, Jacks and Brakes.
Structure: It is an arrangement of group of resistant bodies having no relative motion between them.
Ex: Railway, Bridge, machine frame.
Difference between Machine and Structure:
Machine Structure
Parts move relative to another Parts don’t move relative to another
Transfer energy into useful work Doesn't Transfer energy into useful work
Links transmit both power and motion Links transmit forces only
2. Centripetal force acts inwards: �=�
�
2
�
,
�
2
�
= centripetal acceleration
Moment of Inertia: It is the product of mass & square of the perpendicular distance. �=��
2
��.�
2
k=radius of gyration
Torque: It is the moment of force. It is the product of force and perpendicular distance.
�=�.� �.� �� � For rotation bodies: �=�.?????? �.� �� �
Work: It is the product of force and displacement.
�=�.� �.� �� � For rotation bodies: �=�.� �.� �� �
Work done on moving a body is equal to its change in Kinetic Energy (∆K.E).
Work done on lifting a body is equal to its change in Potential Energy (∆P.E).
Power: It is the rate of doing work or work done per unit time.
�=
���� ����
����
=
�
�
��⁄ �� ���� (1 hp=746 W), For rotation bodies: �=�.?????? ��⁄ �� ����
Energy: It is the capacity to do work. There are different forms of energy like mechanical energy,
electrical energy, chemical energy, heat energy, light energy, wind energy, etc.
Law of energy conservation: Total energy in the universe is constant. ��+��=��������
Or energy cannot be created or destroyed but it can be converted from one form to other.
Potential Energy: It is the energy due to the position of the body. �.�=��ℎ �.� �� �
Strain Energy: It is the energy due to deformed of the body.
�.�=
1
2
⁄ ��
2
�.� �� � , S=Stiffness in N/m, x= distance in m
Kinetic Energy: It is the energy due to motion of the body.
�.�=
1
2
⁄��
2
�.� �� � For rotation bodies: �.�=
1
2
⁄�??????
2
�.� �� �
Efficiency of a Machine: It is the ratio of output power to the input power. ƞ=
������
�����
�� ��??????�
4.2 Concepts of Mechanisms
Machines are devices which use energy to do some useful work.
Machines are made using parts or bodies or links.
Machines use mechanisms to get the required motion.
Kinematic Link or Element: It is a part of machine which has relative motion and resistant body.
Resistant body: It is transmission the required motion with negligible deformation.
Types of Links:
1. Rigid Link: It is a link or a body which can transmit motion with no deformation. Ex: Connecting
rod or Crank.
2. Flexible Link: It is a link or a body which can transmit motion with partly deformation. Ex: Belt,
Rope, Chain.
3. Fluid Link: The transmission of motion takes place though fluid under pressure. Ex: Hydraulic
presses, Jacks and Brakes.
Structure: It is an arrangement of group of resistant bodies having no relative motion between them.
Ex: Railway, Bridge, machine frame.
Difference between Machine and Structure:
Machine Structure
Parts move relative to another Parts don’t move relative to another
Transfer energy into useful work Doesn't Transfer energy into useful work
Links transmit both power and motion Links transmit forces only
37
Kinematic Pair: The motion between two links or elements that contact with each other is completely
constrained or successfully constrained.
Types of constrained motions:
1. Completely constrained motion: The motion between pair is limited to one direction.
Ex: Square bar in a square hole.
2. Incompletely constrained motion: The motion between pair can take place in more than
one direction. Ex: Shaft in a circular hole.
3. Successfully constrained motion: The motion between pair is not completed by itself, but
by external force. Ex: Foot step bearing.
Classification of kinematic pairs:
1. According to the type of relative motion between the elements:
a) Sliding pair: When two elements of pair are connected and one slides to other
fixed link. Ex: Piston and cylinder.
b) Turning pair: When two elements of pair are connected and one turns about
other fixed link. Ex: shaft fitted into a circular hole.
c) Rolling pair: When two elements of pair are connected and one rolls over other
fixed link. Ex: Ball and roller bearing.
d) Screw pair: When two elements of pair are connected and one turns about other
link by screw threads. Ex: bolt and nut.
e) Spherical pair: When two elements of pair are connected and one turns about
other fixed link. Ex: attachment of car mirror, Ball and socket joint.
2. According to the type of contact between the elements:
a) Lower pair: When two elements of pair have a surface contact and motion
between them is turning or sliding. Ex: Sliding pairs, Turning pairs and Screw pairs.
b) Higher pair: When two elements of pair have a point or line contact and motion
between them is partly turning and partly sliding. Ex: Toothed gearing, belt and
rope drives.
3. According to the type of closure:
a) Self-closed pair: When two elements of pair are connected together
mechanically. Ex: Lower pair.
b) Forced closed pair: When two elements of pair not connected together
mechanically, but they are kept in contact by external forces. Ex: Cam & Follower.
Kinematic Chain: Kinematic pairs are joined that last link is joined to the first link to transmit motion.
Types of joints:
1. Binary joint: If two links are jointed at the same point.
2. Ternary joint: If three links are jointed at the same point.
3. Quaternary joint: If four links are jointed at the same point.
Mechanism: In a kinematic chain, if one of the links is fixed. Ex: Engine indicators, typewriter.
Types of mechanism:
1. Simple mechanism: If the mechanism has only four links.
2. Compound mechanism: If the mechanism has more than four links.
Kinematic Pair: The motion between two links or elements that contact with each other is completely
constrained or successfully constrained.
Types of constrained motions:
1. Completely constrained motion: The motion between pair is limited to one direction.
Ex: Square bar in a square hole.
2. Incompletely constrained motion: The motion between pair can take place in more than
one direction. Ex: Shaft in a circular hole.
3. Successfully constrained motion: The motion between pair is not completed by itself, but
by external force. Ex: Foot step bearing.
Classification of kinematic pairs:
1. According to the type of relative motion between the elements:
a) Sliding pair: When two elements of pair are connected and one slides to other
fixed link. Ex: Piston and cylinder.
b) Turning pair: When two elements of pair are connected and one turns about
other fixed link. Ex: shaft fitted into a circular hole.
c) Rolling pair: When two elements of pair are connected and one rolls over other
fixed link. Ex: Ball and roller bearing.
d) Screw pair: When two elements of pair are connected and one turns about other
link by screw threads. Ex: bolt and nut.
e) Spherical pair: When two elements of pair are connected and one turns about
other fixed link. Ex: attachment of car mirror, Ball and socket joint.
2. According to the type of contact between the elements:
a) Lower pair: When two elements of pair have a surface contact and motion
between them is turning or sliding. Ex: Sliding pairs, Turning pairs and Screw pairs.
b) Higher pair: When two elements of pair have a point or line contact and motion
between them is partly turning and partly sliding. Ex: Toothed gearing, belt and
rope drives.
3. According to the type of closure:
a) Self-closed pair: When two elements of pair are connected together
mechanically. Ex: Lower pair.
b) Forced closed pair: When two elements of pair not connected together
mechanically, but they are kept in contact by external forces. Ex: Cam & Follower.
Kinematic Chain: Kinematic pairs are joined that last link is joined to the first link to transmit motion.
Types of joints:
1. Binary joint: If two links are jointed at the same point.
2. Ternary joint: If three links are jointed at the same point.
3. Quaternary joint: If four links are jointed at the same point.
Mechanism: In a kinematic chain, if one of the links is fixed. Ex: Engine indicators, typewriter.
Types of mechanism:
1. Simple mechanism: If the mechanism has only four links.
2. Compound mechanism: If the mechanism has more than four links.
38
4.3 Computer Simulation of Mechanisms
It is creating a mechanism model in the computer to see how it works by changing different parameters.
Advantages of computer simulation of mechanisms:
Easy and quick to make models and test in computers.
Low cost compared to actual testing.
Problems complex can be analyzed before making the real mechanisms.
Steps of computer simulation of mechanisms:
1. Creating the model of different parts of the mechanisms
2. Assembling the parts
3. Applying the parameters to different parts
4. Running the model
5. Observing the results of working of mechanisms
6. If the mechanism doesn’t work, change the parameters and check until it works.
7. Use the data for making the real time mechanisms
Common software used for computer simulation of mechanisms:
1. ADAMS - Automatic Dynamic Analysis of Mechanical System
2. ANSYS – Analysis of System
3. Pro-Engineer
4. CATIA – Computer Aided Three-Dimensional Interactive Application
5. UG – Unigraphics
6. Autodesk – Inventor
4.4 Balancing of Rotating and Reciprocating Masses
Balancing is the process of designing a machine in which unbalance force is minimum.
Machines and Engines have moving elements or parts. Some of them are rotating and some
of them are reciprocating. These parts should be balanced. If the parts in a machine are not
balanced, unbalanced forces setup in the machine and they increase the loads on machine
parts and also create stresses and vibrations in the machine parts.
Balancing of Rotating Masses:
When any the part is rotating, it produced centrifugal force. If this centrifugal force is
unbalanced then it bends the parts of the machine. To balance this unbalanced centrifugal
force, a mass is attached opposite side of the part to balance the centrifugal force.
Balancing of Reciprocating Masses:
There are various forces acting on the reciprocating parts of an engine. The resultant of all
the forces is known as unbalanced force or shaking force. If the resultant is zero, then there
is no unbalanced force. And if the resultant increased, then the unbalanced force will
increase.
4.5 Cams and Followers
There are several machine elements used to transmit the power from one part to other.
Ex: gears, belts, cams, chains etc.
Cams: It is a component of machine that is used to transmit motion to another
component called follower. It is used to transform a rotary motion into a translating or
oscillating motion.
A cam mechanism consists of three elements: the cam, the follower and the frame.
4.3 Computer Simulation of Mechanisms
It is creating a mechanism model in the computer to see how it works by changing different parameters.
Advantages of computer simulation of mechanisms:
Easy and quick to make models and test in computers.
Low cost compared to actual testing.
Problems complex can be analyzed before making the real mechanisms.
Steps of computer simulation of mechanisms:
1. Creating the model of different parts of the mechanisms
2. Assembling the parts
3. Applying the parameters to different parts
4. Running the model
5. Observing the results of working of mechanisms
6. If the mechanism doesn’t work, change the parameters and check until it works.
7. Use the data for making the real time mechanisms
Common software used for computer simulation of mechanisms:
1. ADAMS - Automatic Dynamic Analysis of Mechanical System
2. ANSYS – Analysis of System
3. Pro-Engineer
4. CATIA – Computer Aided Three-Dimensional Interactive Application
5. UG – Unigraphics
6. Autodesk – Inventor
4.4 Balancing of Rotating and Reciprocating Masses
Balancing is the process of designing a machine in which unbalance force is minimum.
Machines and Engines have moving elements or parts. Some of them are rotating and some
of them are reciprocating. These parts should be balanced. If the parts in a machine are not
balanced, unbalanced forces setup in the machine and they increase the loads on machine
parts and also create stresses and vibrations in the machine parts.
Balancing of Rotating Masses:
When any the part is rotating, it produced centrifugal force. If this centrifugal force is
unbalanced then it bends the parts of the machine. To balance this unbalanced centrifugal
force, a mass is attached opposite side of the part to balance the centrifugal force.
Balancing of Reciprocating Masses:
There are various forces acting on the reciprocating parts of an engine. The resultant of all
the forces is known as unbalanced force or shaking force. If the resultant is zero, then there
is no unbalanced force. And if the resultant increased, then the unbalanced force will
increase.
4.5 Cams and Followers
There are several machine elements used to transmit the power from one part to other.
Ex: gears, belts, cams, chains etc.
Cams: It is a component of machine that is used to transmit motion to another
component called follower. It is used to transform a rotary motion into a translating or
oscillating motion.
A cam mechanism consists of three elements: the cam, the follower and the frame.
39
Applications of Cams:
1. Opening and closing of valves in IC engines
2. Paper cutting machinery
3. Making clothes machinery (Textile machinery)
4. Automatic lath machine
5. Printing presses
6. Food processing machinery
Classification of followers
1. According to the surface of contact
a) Knife Edge Follower: If the contacting end of the follower is
knife edge. It is used in applications where low force is
applied on follower and cam rotates with low speeds.
b) Roller follower: If the contacting end of the follower is
roller. It is used in stationary gas engines and aircraft
engines where high force on follower and high speed of
cam.
c) Flat faced follower: If the contacting end of the follower is
flat face. It is used in automobile IC engines where medium
force is applied on follower and cam rotates with medium
speeds.
d) Spherical faced follower: If the contacting end of the
follower is spherical shape. It is used in automobile engines
where medium force is applied on follower and cam
rotates with medium speeds. The flat end of the follower is
machined to a spherical shape reduced surface stresses.
2. According to the motion of follower
a) Reciprocating or translating follower: when the
uniform rotary motion of the cam is converted into
reciprocating motion of the follower.
b) Oscillating or rotating follower: when the uniform
rotary motion of the cam is converted into oscillating
motion of the follower.
Applications of Cams:
1. Opening and closing of valves in IC engines
2. Paper cutting machinery
3. Making clothes machinery (Textile machinery)
4. Automatic lath machine
5. Printing presses
6. Food processing machinery
Classification of followers
1. According to the surface of contact
a) Knife Edge Follower: If the contacting end of the follower is
knife edge. It is used in applications where low force is
applied on follower and cam rotates with low speeds.
b) Roller follower: If the contacting end of the follower is
roller. It is used in stationary gas engines and aircraft
engines where high force on follower and high speed of
cam.
c) Flat faced follower: If the contacting end of the follower is
flat face. It is used in automobile IC engines where medium
force is applied on follower and cam rotates with medium
speeds.
d) Spherical faced follower: If the contacting end of the
follower is spherical shape. It is used in automobile engines
where medium force is applied on follower and cam
rotates with medium speeds. The flat end of the follower is
machined to a spherical shape reduced surface stresses.
2. According to the motion of follower
a) Reciprocating or translating follower: when the
uniform rotary motion of the cam is converted into
reciprocating motion of the follower.
b) Oscillating or rotating follower: when the uniform
rotary motion of the cam is converted into oscillating
motion of the follower.
40
3. According to the path of motion of the follower
a) Radial follower: When the motion of the follower is passing
through the axis of the cam center.
b) Offset follower: When the motion of the follower is
passing away from the axis of the cam center.
Classification of Cams:
1. Radial Cam or Disc Cam: The reciprocating or oscillating follower is
perpendicular to the cam axis.
2. Cylindrical Cam: The reciprocating or oscillating follower is
parallel to the cam axis.
Motion of follower
1. Uniform velocity
2. Simple harmonic motion
3. Uniform acceleration and retardation
4. Cycloidal motion
4.6 Gears Drives
They are mechanical elements that are used to transmit the power from one shaft to another.
Types of Gears
1. Spur Gears: The teeth of the gear are cut parallel to the axis of the
wheel. They are used to transmit power when shafts are parallel.
2. Helical Gears: The teeth of the gear are cut inclined to the axis of the
wheel. They are used to transmit power when shafts are parallel. They
have more contact area compared to spur gears, so they run smoothly
with less noise.
3. Herringbone Gears (Double helical gears): The teeth of the gear are
cut inclined to the axis of the wheel in two sides. They are used to
transmit power when shafts are parallel. They are used to reduce
thrust force on gear shafts.
3. According to the path of motion of the follower
a) Radial follower: When the motion of the follower is passing
through the axis of the cam center.
b) Offset follower: When the motion of the follower is
passing away from the axis of the cam center.
Classification of Cams:
1. Radial Cam or Disc Cam: The reciprocating or oscillating follower is
perpendicular to the cam axis.
2. Cylindrical Cam: The reciprocating or oscillating follower is
parallel to the cam axis.
Motion of follower
1. Uniform velocity
2. Simple harmonic motion
3. Uniform acceleration and retardation
4. Cycloidal motion
4.6 Gears Drives
They are mechanical elements that are used to transmit the power from one shaft to another.
Types of Gears
1. Spur Gears: The teeth of the gear are cut parallel to the axis of the
wheel. They are used to transmit power when shafts are parallel.
2. Helical Gears: The teeth of the gear are cut inclined to the axis of the
wheel. They are used to transmit power when shafts are parallel. They
have more contact area compared to spur gears, so they run smoothly
with less noise.
3. Herringbone Gears (Double helical gears): The teeth of the gear are
cut inclined to the axis of the wheel in two sides. They are used to
transmit power when shafts are parallel. They are used to reduce
thrust force on gear shafts.
41
4. Bevel Spur Gears: Wheel is made in bevel shape and the teeth of the
gear are cut around the bevel surface of the wheel. . They are used to
transmit power when the angle between shafts is 90°.
5. Bevel Helical Gears: Wheel is made in bevel shape and the teeth of
the gear are cut inclined around the bevel surface of the wheel. They
have more contact area compared to the bevel gears, so they run
smoothly with less noise. They are used to transmit power when the
angle between shafts is 90°.
6. Worm Gears: the teeth of the gear are cut in spiral shape around the
wheel. They are used to transmit power when the angle between
shafts is 90°and high reductions in velocities are required.
7. Rack and Pinion: If the teeth are cut on straight surface it is called
Rack. If the teeth are cut on circular surface it is called Pinion. The
combination is called Rack and Pinion. They are used to convert
the rotary motion into reciprocating motion and vice versa.
Advantages of gear drives:
They can transmit large powers
They can transmit exact velocity ratios
They have reliable service
Disadvantages of gear drives
Manufacturing of gears required special tools and equipment
Errors in cutting teeth cause vibrations
Simple Gear Train
There is only one gear on each shaft.
Speed of gear is inversely proportional to the number of teeth.
Speed ratio: Speed of the driver to the driven.
N
1
N
2
=
T
2
T
1
Train value: Speed of the driven to the driver.
N
2
N
1
=
T
1
T
2
N1= Speed of the driver in rpm
N2= Speed of the driven in rpm
T1= Number of the teeth on gear 1
T1= Number of the teeth on gear 2
4. Bevel Spur Gears: Wheel is made in bevel shape and the teeth of the
gear are cut around the bevel surface of the wheel. . They are used to
transmit power when the angle between shafts is 90°.
5. Bevel Helical Gears: Wheel is made in bevel shape and the teeth of
the gear are cut inclined around the bevel surface of the wheel. They
have more contact area compared to the bevel gears, so they run
smoothly with less noise. They are used to transmit power when the
angle between shafts is 90°.
6. Worm Gears: the teeth of the gear are cut in spiral shape around the
wheel. They are used to transmit power when the angle between
shafts is 90°and high reductions in velocities are required.
7. Rack and Pinion: If the teeth are cut on straight surface it is called
Rack. If the teeth are cut on circular surface it is called Pinion. The
combination is called Rack and Pinion. They are used to convert
the rotary motion into reciprocating motion and vice versa.
Advantages of gear drives:
They can transmit large powers
They can transmit exact velocity ratios
They have reliable service
Disadvantages of gear drives
Manufacturing of gears required special tools and equipment
Errors in cutting teeth cause vibrations
Simple Gear Train
There is only one gear on each shaft.
Speed of gear is inversely proportional to the number of teeth.
Speed ratio: Speed of the driver to the driven.
N
1
N
2
=
T
2
T
1
Train value: Speed of the driven to the driver.
N
2
N
1
=
T
1
T
2
N1= Speed of the driver in rpm
N2= Speed of the driven in rpm
T1= Number of the teeth on gear 1
T1= Number of the teeth on gear 2
42
Compound Gear Train
There is more than one gear on each shaft.
They are used when speed changes are required
between two shafts.
Speed ratio =
Speed of the first driver
Speed of the last driver
=
Product of the number of teeth on the drivens
Product of the number of teeth on the drivers
=
N
1
N
6
=
T
2 × T4 × T6
T
1 × T3 × T
5
Train value: Speed of the last driven to the first driver.
N
6
N
1
=
T
1 × T3 × T
5
T
2 × T4 × T6
Epicyclic Gear Train
They are used to transmit high velocity ratios with less space.
They are used in Lathes, differential gears of automobiles, wrist
watches etc.
It has gear A, gear B and arm C. If the arm C is fixed, it acts like a
simple gear train.
If the gear A is fixed, then the arm and gear B can rotate clockwise
or anticlockwise around the gear A, it is called Epicyclic motion.
Table of Motions:
Step
No.
Condition of motion Revolution of elements
Arm C Gear A Gear B
1.
2.
3.
4.
Arm fixed, Gear A rotates +1 rev anticlockwise
Arm fixed, Gear A rotates +1 rev anticlockwise
Add +y rev to all elements
Total motion
0
0
+�
+�
+1
+�
+�
�+�
−
�
�
�
�
−�
�
�
�
�
+�
�−�
�
�
�
�
4.7 Belt Drives
It is a loop of flexible material used to link two of rotating shafts for transmission of motion or
power.
Selection of a belt drive: It depends upon the following factors:
1. Speed of driving and driving shafts
2. Speed reduction ratio
3. Power to be transmitted
4. Positive drive requirements
5. Shafts layout
Types of belt drives
1. According to the speed of belt drives
a) Light drives: They are used to transmit small powers at belt speeds up to
about 10 m/s. Ex: in agricultural machine and small machine tools.
b) Medium drives: They are used to transmit medium powers at belt speeds
between 10 m/s and 22 m/s. Ex: in machine tools
c) Heavy drives: They are used to transmit large powers at belt speeds above
22 m/s. Ex: in compressor and generators.
Compound Gear Train
There is more than one gear on each shaft.
They are used when speed changes are required
between two shafts.
Speed ratio =
Speed of the first driver
Speed of the last driver
=
Product of the number of teeth on the drivens
Product of the number of teeth on the drivers
=
N
1
N
6
=
T
2 × T4 × T6
T
1 × T3 × T
5
Train value: Speed of the last driven to the first driver.
N
6
N
1
=
T
1 × T3 × T
5
T
2 × T4 × T6
Epicyclic Gear Train
They are used to transmit high velocity ratios with less space.
They are used in Lathes, differential gears of automobiles, wrist
watches etc.
It has gear A, gear B and arm C. If the arm C is fixed, it acts like a
simple gear train.
If the gear A is fixed, then the arm and gear B can rotate clockwise
or anticlockwise around the gear A, it is called Epicyclic motion.
Table of Motions:
Step
No.
Condition of motion Revolution of elements
Arm C Gear A Gear B
1.
2.
3.
4.
Arm fixed, Gear A rotates +1 rev anticlockwise
Arm fixed, Gear A rotates +1 rev anticlockwise
Add +y rev to all elements
Total motion
0
0
+�
+�
+1
+�
+�
�+�
−
�
�
�
�
−�
�
�
�
�
+�
�−�
�
�
�
�
4.7 Belt Drives
It is a loop of flexible material used to link two of rotating shafts for transmission of motion or
power.
Selection of a belt drive: It depends upon the following factors:
1. Speed of driving and driving shafts
2. Speed reduction ratio
3. Power to be transmitted
4. Positive drive requirements
5. Shafts layout
Types of belt drives
1. According to the speed of belt drives
a) Light drives: They are used to transmit small powers at belt speeds up to
about 10 m/s. Ex: in agricultural machine and small machine tools.
b) Medium drives: They are used to transmit medium powers at belt speeds
between 10 m/s and 22 m/s. Ex: in machine tools
c) Heavy drives: They are used to transmit large powers at belt speeds above
22 m/s. Ex: in compressor and generators.
43
2. According to the shape of cross section of belt drives
a) Flat belt: The cross section of the belt is like
rectangular shape. They are used to transmit medium
power where distance between pulleys is medium.
b) V-belt: The cross section of the belt is like V-shape.
They are used to transmit medium power where
pulleys are very near to each other.
c) Rope: The cross section of the belt is like circular
shape. They are used to transmit large power where
pulleys are far to each other.
3. According to the construction and working
a) Open belt drive: It is used when
shafts are arranged in parallel and
rotating in the same direction.
The tension is more in the lower
side (tight side) and less in the
upper side (slack side).
b) Crossed belt drive: It is used
when shafts are arranged in
parallel and rotating in opposite
direction.
c) Belt drive with idler pulleys: Idler
pulleys are used to increase the
contact angle on the smaller
pulleys. It is used to obtain high
velocity ratios.
d) Compound belt drive: It is used to
increase or decrease the driven
shaft speed.
2. According to the shape of cross section of belt drives
a) Flat belt: The cross section of the belt is like
rectangular shape. They are used to transmit medium
power where distance between pulleys is medium.
b) V-belt: The cross section of the belt is like V-shape.
They are used to transmit medium power where
pulleys are very near to each other.
c) Rope: The cross section of the belt is like circular
shape. They are used to transmit large power where
pulleys are far to each other.
3. According to the construction and working
a) Open belt drive: It is used when
shafts are arranged in parallel and
rotating in the same direction.
The tension is more in the lower
side (tight side) and less in the
upper side (slack side).
b) Crossed belt drive: It is used
when shafts are arranged in
parallel and rotating in opposite
direction.
c) Belt drive with idler pulleys: Idler
pulleys are used to increase the
contact angle on the smaller
pulleys. It is used to obtain high
velocity ratios.
d) Compound belt drive: It is used to
increase or decrease the driven
shaft speed.
44
e) Stepped or cone pulley drive: It is used to
change the speed of the driven shaft when
driving shaft runs at constant speed.
f) Loose and Fast pulley drive: They put on
the driven shaft to stop it whenever it is
required.
Velocity ratio of belt drives:
Velocity ratio: Speed of the driven to the driver.
N
2
N
1
=
d
1
d
2
When the thickness (t) of the belt is considered: Velocity ratio:
N
2
N
1
=
d
1+�
d
2+�
d1=diameter of the driver
d2=diameter of the driven
N1=speed of the driver
N2=speed of the driven
Velocity ratio of a compound belt:
Speed of the last driven
Speed of the first driver
=
Product of the diameters on the drivens
Product of the diameters on the drivers
N
4
N
1
=
d
1 × d
2
d
2 × d
4
Slip of belt: The pulley moves without carrying belt with it because the frictional grip between belt and
pulley is insufficient. It is considered in percentages. If the percentage of slip is "s", then
Velocity ratio:
N
2
N
1
=d
1d
2(1−(�100⁄))⁄
Power transmitted by a belt:
�=(�
1−�
2).� ����
T1= Tension in the tight side of the belt
T2= Tension in the slack side of the belt
v= Velocity of the belt in m/s
Materials used for Belts: Leather, Fabric (Cotton),Rubber fabric combination,Balata fabric combination
4.8 Wire Ropes
They are used to transmit power from one pulley to another
when the distance between pulleys is long (up to 150m apart)
They are used in elevators, mine hoists, cranes, conveyors,
handling devices and suspension bridges
They are made from cold drawn wires in order to have high
strength and durability of the rope.
They are made from wrought iron, cast steel and alloy steel.
The core made from jute, asbestos or a wire of softer steel.
e) Stepped or cone pulley drive: It is used to
change the speed of the driven shaft when
driving shaft runs at constant speed.
f) Loose and Fast pulley drive: They put on
the driven shaft to stop it whenever it is
required.
Velocity ratio of belt drives:
Velocity ratio: Speed of the driven to the driver.
N
2
N
1
=
d
1
d
2
When the thickness (t) of the belt is considered: Velocity ratio:
N
2
N
1
=
d
1+�
d
2+�
d1=diameter of the driver
d2=diameter of the driven
N1=speed of the driver
N2=speed of the driven
Velocity ratio of a compound belt:
Speed of the last driven
Speed of the first driver
=
Product of the diameters on the drivens
Product of the diameters on the drivers
N
4
N
1
=
d
1 × d
2
d
2 × d
4
Slip of belt: The pulley moves without carrying belt with it because the frictional grip between belt and
pulley is insufficient. It is considered in percentages. If the percentage of slip is "s", then
Velocity ratio:
N
2
N
1
=d
1d
2(1−(�100⁄))⁄
Power transmitted by a belt:
�=(�
1−�
2).� ����
T1= Tension in the tight side of the belt
T2= Tension in the slack side of the belt
v= Velocity of the belt in m/s
Materials used for Belts: Leather, Fabric (Cotton),Rubber fabric combination,Balata fabric combination
4.8 Wire Ropes
They are used to transmit power from one pulley to another
when the distance between pulleys is long (up to 150m apart)
They are used in elevators, mine hoists, cranes, conveyors,
handling devices and suspension bridges
They are made from cold drawn wires in order to have high
strength and durability of the rope.
They are made from wrought iron, cast steel and alloy steel.
The core made from jute, asbestos or a wire of softer steel.
45
Advantages of wire ropes
1. Withstand shock loads
2. Have more durable
3. Have silent operation
4. Have high efficiency
5. Have more reliable
Designation of wire ropes
Standard designation (No. of strand × No. of wire) Application
6×7 rope It is used as rope in mines, tramways and power
transmission.
6×19 rope It is used in mine hoists, quarries, cranes, dredges,
elevators, tram ways etc.
6×37 rope It is used in steel mill ladles, cranes and high speed
elevators.
8×19 rope It is used in hoisting rope.
Procedure for designing a wire rope
1. Selection of rope from the table (Example: 6×7)
2. Find the design load
3. Find the rope diameter
4. Find the wire diameter and rope area
5. Find the various stresses acting in the rope
6. Find the effective loads on the rope during normal working, during starting and during
acceleration of the load.
7. Find the actual factor of safety (FOS) and compare with the factor assumed initially. If the
actual factor of safety is within permissible limits, then the design is safe.
Failure of wire ropes: It is due to fatigue adhesive and wear.
4.9 Breaks
It is a device used to bring a moving system to rest, to slow its speed, or to control its speed.
The function of a break is to turn mechanical energy into heat.
Types of breaks
1. Hydraulic breaks
2. Electric breaks
3. Mechanical breaks
Type of mechanical brakes according to the direction of action force:
a) Radial brakes: The force acting on the brake drum is in radial direction.
They are divided into external brakes and internal brakes.
b) Axial brakes: The force acting on the brake drum is in axial direction. They
are divided into disc brakes and cone brakes.
The hydraulic and electric brakes cannot bring the system to rest, and they are used
where large amounts of energy are to be transformed.
Characteristics of brake materials
1. Have high coefficient of friction
2. Have low wear rate
3. Have high heat resistance
4. Have high heat dissipation capacity
5. Have low coefficient of thermal expansion
6. Have enough mechanical strength
7. Not affected by moisture and oil
Advantages of wire ropes
1. Withstand shock loads
2. Have more durable
3. Have silent operation
4. Have high efficiency
5. Have more reliable
Designation of wire ropes
Standard designation (No. of strand × No. of wire) Application
6×7 rope It is used as rope in mines, tramways and power
transmission.
6×19 rope It is used in mine hoists, quarries, cranes, dredges,
elevators, tram ways etc.
6×37 rope It is used in steel mill ladles, cranes and high speed
elevators.
8×19 rope It is used in hoisting rope.
Procedure for designing a wire rope
1. Selection of rope from the table (Example: 6×7)
2. Find the design load
3. Find the rope diameter
4. Find the wire diameter and rope area
5. Find the various stresses acting in the rope
6. Find the effective loads on the rope during normal working, during starting and during
acceleration of the load.
7. Find the actual factor of safety (FOS) and compare with the factor assumed initially. If the
actual factor of safety is within permissible limits, then the design is safe.
Failure of wire ropes: It is due to fatigue adhesive and wear.
4.9 Breaks
It is a device used to bring a moving system to rest, to slow its speed, or to control its speed.
The function of a break is to turn mechanical energy into heat.
Types of breaks
1. Hydraulic breaks
2. Electric breaks
3. Mechanical breaks
Type of mechanical brakes according to the direction of action force:
a) Radial brakes: The force acting on the brake drum is in radial direction.
They are divided into external brakes and internal brakes.
b) Axial brakes: The force acting on the brake drum is in axial direction. They
are divided into disc brakes and cone brakes.
The hydraulic and electric brakes cannot bring the system to rest, and they are used
where large amounts of energy are to be transformed.
Characteristics of brake materials
1. Have high coefficient of friction
2. Have low wear rate
3. Have high heat resistance
4. Have high heat dissipation capacity
5. Have low coefficient of thermal expansion
6. Have enough mechanical strength
7. Not affected by moisture and oil
46
Single block or shoe brake
It consists of a block or shoe witch is pressed against
the wheel by a force applied to one end and other
end is fixed.
The block is made of a softer material than the rim
of a wheel.
It is used on railway trains and tram cars.
The friction between the block and the wheel causes a tangential braking force, which delay
the motion of the wheel.
Self-energizing brakes: The frictional force helps to apply the brake.
Self-locking brake: The frictional force is great enough to apply the brake with no external
force.
Pivoted block or shoe brake
It consists of a pivoted block or shoe witch is
pressed against the wheel by a force applied to one
end and other end is fixed.
The angle of contact is greater than 60°, then the
pressure of contact between the block and wheel is
less at the ends than at the center.
Double block or shoe brake
It consists of two blocks or shoes applied at opposite ends
of the wheel.
It is used to overcome bending of the shaft that produced
in the single block brake caused additional load is applied
on the shaft bearings due to normal force (RN).
It is used in electric cranes.
4.10 Clutches
They are a machine member used to connect a driving shaft to a driven shaft so that the
driven shaft maybe started or stopped without stopping the driving shaft (engine).
They are used in automobiles.
Types of clutches
1. Positive clutches: They are used when a positive drive is required.
a) Positive jaw clutch: It allows one shaft to drive another through a direct
contact of interlocking jaws.
Types of friction clutches
i. Square jaw clutch: It is used where engagement and
disengagement in motion is not necessary. It transmits power
in either direction of rotation.
ii. Spiral jaw clutch: It is used where engagement and
disengagement in motion is necessary. It transmits power in
one direction only.
Single block or shoe brake
It consists of a block or shoe witch is pressed against
the wheel by a force applied to one end and other
end is fixed.
The block is made of a softer material than the rim
of a wheel.
It is used on railway trains and tram cars.
The friction between the block and the wheel causes a tangential braking force, which delay
the motion of the wheel.
Self-energizing brakes: The frictional force helps to apply the brake.
Self-locking brake: The frictional force is great enough to apply the brake with no external
force.
Pivoted block or shoe brake
It consists of a pivoted block or shoe witch is
pressed against the wheel by a force applied to one
end and other end is fixed.
The angle of contact is greater than 60°, then the
pressure of contact between the block and wheel is
less at the ends than at the center.
Double block or shoe brake
It consists of two blocks or shoes applied at opposite ends
of the wheel.
It is used to overcome bending of the shaft that produced
in the single block brake caused additional load is applied
on the shaft bearings due to normal force (RN).
It is used in electric cranes.
4.10 Clutches
They are a machine member used to connect a driving shaft to a driven shaft so that the
driven shaft maybe started or stopped without stopping the driving shaft (engine).
They are used in automobiles.
Types of clutches
1. Positive clutches: They are used when a positive drive is required.
a) Positive jaw clutch: It allows one shaft to drive another through a direct
contact of interlocking jaws.
Types of friction clutches
i. Square jaw clutch: It is used where engagement and
disengagement in motion is not necessary. It transmits power
in either direction of rotation.
ii. Spiral jaw clutch: It is used where engagement and
disengagement in motion is necessary. It transmits power in
one direction only.
47
b) Friction clutches: They are used to transmit power of shafts and machines
which must be started and stopped frequently. In automobiles, friction clutch
is used to connect the engine to the drive shaft.
.
Characteristics of brake materials
i. Have high coefficient of friction
ii. have high heat conductivity
iii. Have high heat resistance
iv. Not affected by moisture and oil
Types of friction clutches
1. Disc or plate clutches
a) Single disc or plate clutch: It is a dry clutch. It is
used in applications where large space is available,
such as trucks and cars.
b) Multiple disc or plate clutch: It is a wet clutches. It
is used in applications where small space is
available, such as scooter and motorbike.
Dry and wet clutches
i. Dry clutch has a higher coefficient of
fraction than wet clutch.
ii. Dry clutch has a higher torque capacity
than wet clutches.
iii. Heat dissipation is more difficult in dry
clutch than wet clutch.
iv. Rate of wear is less in wet clutch than dry
clutch.
2. Cone clutches: They was used in automobiles, but now a
day it has been replaced by the disc clutch.
3. Centrifugal clutches: It uses a centrifugal force to connect
driving shaft to the driven shaft. It works more at higher
speeds. It is used in lawn mowers, chainsaws, mini bikes,
and boats.
b) Friction clutches: They are used to transmit power of shafts and machines
which must be started and stopped frequently. In automobiles, friction clutch
is used to connect the engine to the drive shaft.
.
Characteristics of brake materials
i. Have high coefficient of friction
ii. have high heat conductivity
iii. Have high heat resistance
iv. Not affected by moisture and oil
Types of friction clutches
1. Disc or plate clutches
a) Single disc or plate clutch: It is a dry clutch. It is
used in applications where large space is available,
such as trucks and cars.
b) Multiple disc or plate clutch: It is a wet clutches. It
is used in applications where small space is
available, such as scooter and motorbike.
Dry and wet clutches
i. Dry clutch has a higher coefficient of
fraction than wet clutch.
ii. Dry clutch has a higher torque capacity
than wet clutches.
iii. Heat dissipation is more difficult in dry
clutch than wet clutch.
iv. Rate of wear is less in wet clutch than dry
clutch.
2. Cone clutches: They was used in automobiles, but now a
day it has been replaced by the disc clutch.
3. Centrifugal clutches: It uses a centrifugal force to connect
driving shaft to the driven shaft. It works more at higher
speeds. It is used in lawn mowers, chainsaws, mini bikes,
and boats.
48
49
Thermodynamics 15.1
It is the science of energy. It is the study of energy.
Mass (m): The amount of material present in body. SI unit Kg
Weight (W): the force produced when the mass of body is accelerated by gravitational acceleration. SI
unit N or Kg.m/s
2
. The mass remain constant even if gravitational acceleration changes.
Specific volume(v): It is the Volume per unit mass, SI unit m
3
/kg
Density (P): It is the mass per unit volume, SI unit kg/m
3
Specific Gravity (S.G): Compared density of substance to the density water at standard temperature
(1 g/cm
3
).
Temperature (T): It is a measure of degree of hotness and coldness of the substance. Absolute
temperature scale has only positive values.
Celsius (C) Fahrenheit (F) Kelvin (K) Rankine (R)
scales has 100 units
Freezing point of water is 0
o
C
Boiling point of water is
100
o
C
Eq:
o
C =(
o
F- 32)(5/9)
Scales has 180 units
Freezing point of water is 0
o
F
Boiling point of water is 212
o
F
Eq:
o
F = 32+(9/5)
o
C
The absolute
temperature scale
that corresponds
to Celsius scale.
Eq:
o
K =
o
C+273
The absolute
temperature scale
that corresponds to
Fahrenheit scale.
Eq:
o
R =
o
F+273
Pressure (P): it is the force per unit area. SI unit N/m
2
or Pa. The pressure is measured relative to
perfect vacuum called absolute pressure. The pressure is measured relative to atmospheric called
gauge pressure, and it will be zero when open to the atmosphere. A perfect vacuum if absolute
pressure is zero.
Eq: Pabs = Patm + Pgauge
Pabs = Patm + Pvac
Energy (E): the capacity for doing work.
a) Total Energy (E): sum of kinetic, potential, electrical, magnetic, chemical and nuclear energies.
b) Potential Energy (PE): the energy produced by the body during its position.
c) Kinetic Energy (KE): the energy produced by the body during its motion.
d) Microscopic Energy: The form of energy related to molecular structure of a system.
e) Internal Energy (U): The sum of all microscopic forms of energy. It represents the microscopic
energy of a non-flowing fluid, but enthalpy (h) represents the microscopic energy of a flowing
fluid.
i. Sensible energy or heat: The internal energy associated with the sum of kinetic and
potential energy of the molecules.
ii. Latent energy or heat: The internal energy associated with the phase of a system.
iii. Chemical or bond Energy: The internal energy associated with the atomic bonds in a
molecule.
iv. Nuclear Energy: The internal energy associated with the nucleus of the atom itself.
Thermodynamic System and Surrounding
System is a quantity of matter in space.
Surrounding is everything external to the system.
Boundary is separated the system and surrounding.
System and its surrounding together make a universe.
Types of thermodynamic systems:
Isolated system: neither energy (work or heat) nor mass transfer with its surrounding.
Closed system: No mass transfer, but have energy transfer with its surrounding.
Open system: Both energy and mass transfer with its surrounding.
Thermodynamics 15.1
It is the science of energy. It is the study of energy.
Mass (m): The amount of material present in body. SI unit Kg
Weight (W): the force produced when the mass of body is accelerated by gravitational acceleration. SI
unit N or Kg.m/s
2
. The mass remain constant even if gravitational acceleration changes.
Specific volume(v): It is the Volume per unit mass, SI unit m
3
/kg
Density (P): It is the mass per unit volume, SI unit kg/m
3
Specific Gravity (S.G): Compared density of substance to the density water at standard temperature
(1 g/cm
3
).
Temperature (T): It is a measure of degree of hotness and coldness of the substance. Absolute
temperature scale has only positive values.
Celsius (C) Fahrenheit (F) Kelvin (K) Rankine (R)
scales has 100 units
Freezing point of water is 0
o
C
Boiling point of water is
100
o
C
Eq:
o
C =(
o
F- 32)(5/9)
Scales has 180 units
Freezing point of water is 0
o
F
Boiling point of water is 212
o
F
Eq:
o
F = 32+(9/5)
o
C
The absolute
temperature scale
that corresponds
to Celsius scale.
Eq:
o
K =
o
C+273
The absolute
temperature scale
that corresponds to
Fahrenheit scale.
Eq:
o
R =
o
F+273
Pressure (P): it is the force per unit area. SI unit N/m
2
or Pa. The pressure is measured relative to
perfect vacuum called absolute pressure. The pressure is measured relative to atmospheric called
gauge pressure, and it will be zero when open to the atmosphere. A perfect vacuum if absolute
pressure is zero.
Eq: Pabs = Patm + Pgauge
Pabs = Patm + Pvac
Energy (E): the capacity for doing work.
a) Total Energy (E): sum of kinetic, potential, electrical, magnetic, chemical and nuclear energies.
b) Potential Energy (PE): the energy produced by the body during its position.
c) Kinetic Energy (KE): the energy produced by the body during its motion.
d) Microscopic Energy: The form of energy related to molecular structure of a system.
e) Internal Energy (U): The sum of all microscopic forms of energy. It represents the microscopic
energy of a non-flowing fluid, but enthalpy (h) represents the microscopic energy of a flowing
fluid.
i. Sensible energy or heat: The internal energy associated with the sum of kinetic and
potential energy of the molecules.
ii. Latent energy or heat: The internal energy associated with the phase of a system.
iii. Chemical or bond Energy: The internal energy associated with the atomic bonds in a
molecule.
iv. Nuclear Energy: The internal energy associated with the nucleus of the atom itself.
Thermodynamic System and Surrounding
System is a quantity of matter in space.
Surrounding is everything external to the system.
Boundary is separated the system and surrounding.
System and its surrounding together make a universe.
Types of thermodynamic systems:
Isolated system: neither energy (work or heat) nor mass transfer with its surrounding.
Closed system: No mass transfer, but have energy transfer with its surrounding.
Open system: Both energy and mass transfer with its surrounding.
50
Energy interactions: closed system and its surrounding can interact in two ways:
1. Work transfer: because changes in properties.
2. Heat transfer: because of temperature difference
Thermodynamic Equilibrium: state of rest or balanced.
Types of Equilibrium:
a) Mechanical equilibrium: There is no pressure difference.
b) Thermal equilibrium: There is no temperature difference.
c) Chemical equilibrium: There is no chemical reactions occur.
d) Thermodynamic equilibrium: If all three equilibriums are present.
Thermodynamic Process: The path of states when the system passes.
Cycle process: system and surrounding return to their original condition in the final process.
Reversible process: system and surrounding return to their original condition when stop the
process.
Irreversible process: system and surrounding can't return to their original condition.
Lows of thermodynamics:
First Law of thermodynamic: Energy can't be created nor destroyed, but it can convert from
one form to another.
Second Law of thermodynamics: the total entropy of an isolated system always increases over
time, or remains constant. Or if no energy enters or leaves the system (isolated system), the
potential energy of the state will always be less than that of the initial state.
Zeroth Law of thermodynamics: if two systems, A and B, are in thermal equilibrium with a
third system, C, then A and B are in thermal equilibrium with each other.
Heat engines: the device that converts heat into work.
How heat engine work:
1. Receives heat from a source at higher temperature.
2. Converts a part of heat into work.
3. Reject other part of heat to balance at lower
temperature.
4. Continues to repeat the same cycle.
Petrol engine, Diesel engine, Steam power plant, etc are forms of heat engines.
Thermal efficiency of heat engine: it is the measuring of performance of heat engine.
Ƞth =
Net Workdone
���� ��������
=
�
���
�
??????
=
�
??????−
�
??????
�
??????
=1−[
�
??????
�
??????
]
5.2 Thermodynamics 2
Ideal and Real Gas:
1. Ideal gas: it is one which
Attraction between molecules is zero.
The size of molecules is zero.
Doesn’t change its phase during thermodynamic process.
Obey all gas laws.
2. Real gas: Opposite to ideal gas.
Gas Laws:
Boyles Law: Pressure is inversely proportional to Volume when Temperature is constant. Pv=C
Charles Law: Volume is directly proportional to temperature when pressure is constant.
�
�
=�
Energy interactions: closed system and its surrounding can interact in two ways:
1. Work transfer: because changes in properties.
2. Heat transfer: because of temperature difference
Thermodynamic Equilibrium: state of rest or balanced.
Types of Equilibrium:
a) Mechanical equilibrium: There is no pressure difference.
b) Thermal equilibrium: There is no temperature difference.
c) Chemical equilibrium: There is no chemical reactions occur.
d) Thermodynamic equilibrium: If all three equilibriums are present.
Thermodynamic Process: The path of states when the system passes.
Cycle process: system and surrounding return to their original condition in the final process.
Reversible process: system and surrounding return to their original condition when stop the
process.
Irreversible process: system and surrounding can't return to their original condition.
Lows of thermodynamics:
First Law of thermodynamic: Energy can't be created nor destroyed, but it can convert from
one form to another.
Second Law of thermodynamics: the total entropy of an isolated system always increases over
time, or remains constant. Or if no energy enters or leaves the system (isolated system), the
potential energy of the state will always be less than that of the initial state.
Zeroth Law of thermodynamics: if two systems, A and B, are in thermal equilibrium with a
third system, C, then A and B are in thermal equilibrium with each other.
Heat engines: the device that converts heat into work.
How heat engine work:
1. Receives heat from a source at higher temperature.
2. Converts a part of heat into work.
3. Reject other part of heat to balance at lower
temperature.
4. Continues to repeat the same cycle.
Petrol engine, Diesel engine, Steam power plant, etc are forms of heat engines.
Thermal efficiency of heat engine: it is the measuring of performance of heat engine.
Ƞth =
Net Workdone
���� ��������
=
�
���
�
??????
=
�
??????−
�
??????
�
??????
=1−[
�
??????
�
??????
]
5.2 Thermodynamics 2
Ideal and Real Gas:
1. Ideal gas: it is one which
Attraction between molecules is zero.
The size of molecules is zero.
Doesn’t change its phase during thermodynamic process.
Obey all gas laws.
2. Real gas: Opposite to ideal gas.
Gas Laws:
Boyles Law: Pressure is inversely proportional to Volume when Temperature is constant. Pv=C
Charles Law: Volume is directly proportional to temperature when pressure is constant.
�
�
=�
51
Guy Lassac's Law: Pressure is directly proportional to temperature when volume is constant.
�
�
=�
Avogadro's Law: the volume of 1 kg, mole of all gases at normal temperature & pressure is the same
and it is equal to 22.4 m
3
.
�=
�
�
m=mass; M=molecular weight; n=number of moles
Idea gas equation of state:
PV=mRT Universal Gas Constant (Ru): 8.314 KJ/Kmol.
o
K
Classification of Air Cycle
Ideal Cycles and Actual Engines:
Ideal Cycle:
Processes are Totally Reversible.
Friction, viscous, etc. are absent.
Impossible to achieve in real.
Cycle with maximum possible Efficiency.
CARNOT CYCLE
Ideal Cycle:
Processes are Internally Reversible.
Friction, viscous, etc. are absent.
Impossible to achieve in real.
OTTO
Cycle
Diesel
Cycle
Brayton
Cycle
Rankine
Cycle
Actual Heat Engines:
Processes are Irreversible.
Friction, viscous, etc. are present.
Possible to achieve in real.
Petrol
Engine
Diesel
Engine
Gas
Turbines
Steam
Turbines
Reciprocating Engines: petrol and diesel engines are reciprocating engines.
Terminology of reciprocating engine:
Bore of Cylinder (D): Inner dimeter of cylinder.
Top Dead Center (T.D.C): The end position of piston at the top of the
cylinder
Bottom Dead Center (B.D.C): The end position of piston at the bottom of
cylinder.
Thermodynamic Cycles
Closed Cycles: The
fluid is recycling.
Power Cycles:
Cycles that
produce power or
work as output.
Refrigeration
Cycles: Cycles that
produce cooling as
output.
Gas Cycles: The
phase of fluid
doen't change
between the cycle.
Vapour Cycles:
The phase of fluid
change between
the cycle.
Open Cycles: The
fluid is renewed or
not recycling.
Guy Lassac's Law: Pressure is directly proportional to temperature when volume is constant.
�
�
=�
Avogadro's Law: the volume of 1 kg, mole of all gases at normal temperature & pressure is the same
and it is equal to 22.4 m
3
.
�=
�
�
m=mass; M=molecular weight; n=number of moles
Idea gas equation of state:
PV=mRT Universal Gas Constant (Ru): 8.314 KJ/Kmol.
o
K
Classification of Air Cycle
Ideal Cycles and Actual Engines:
Ideal Cycle:
Processes are Totally Reversible.
Friction, viscous, etc. are absent.
Impossible to achieve in real.
Cycle with maximum possible Efficiency.
CARNOT CYCLE
Ideal Cycle:
Processes are Internally Reversible.
Friction, viscous, etc. are absent.
Impossible to achieve in real.
OTTO
Cycle
Diesel
Cycle
Brayton
Cycle
Rankine
Cycle
Actual Heat Engines:
Processes are Irreversible.
Friction, viscous, etc. are present.
Possible to achieve in real.
Petrol
Engine
Diesel
Engine
Gas
Turbines
Steam
Turbines
Reciprocating Engines: petrol and diesel engines are reciprocating engines.
Terminology of reciprocating engine:
Bore of Cylinder (D): Inner dimeter of cylinder.
Top Dead Center (T.D.C): The end position of piston at the top of the
cylinder
Bottom Dead Center (B.D.C): The end position of piston at the bottom of
cylinder.
Thermodynamic Cycles
Closed Cycles: The
fluid is recycling.
Power Cycles:
Cycles that
produce power or
work as output.
Refrigeration
Cycles: Cycles that
produce cooling as
output.
Gas Cycles: The
phase of fluid
doen't change
between the cycle.
Vapour Cycles:
The phase of fluid
change between
the cycle.
Open Cycles: The
fluid is renewed or
not recycling.
52
Stroke length (L): the distance between TDC and BDC
Swept or Stroke volume (VS): the volume between TDC and BDC. ��=
4
D
2
L
Clearance Volume (Vc): the space between TDC cylinder head. VC = % VS
Volume of cylinder (V): V = Vc + VS
Compression ratio (r): the ratio of cylinder volume to the clearance volume.
�=
�
��
Mean Effective Pressure (mep): the ratio of net workdone to stroke
volume. ���=
��� ���� ����
������ ������
Internal Combustion engines: combustion takes place inside a cylinder.
1. Spark Ignition Engine (S.I. Engine)
Petrol is used as the fuel
Air and fuel (petrol) enter to cylinder and then compressed.
2. Compression Ignition Engines (C.I. Engines)
Diesel is used as the fuel
Only air enters to cylinder and then compressed.
4 stroke petrol engine: the stroke used in a 4 stroke engine are:
1. Suction or intake stroke: Inlet valve is opening, Air and petrol enter, outlet valve is
closed.
2. Compression Stroke: Both valves are closed, Both air and petrol are compressed.
3. Power or Expansion Stroke: Air and Petrol are Combustion, piston move down cause
expansion.
4. Exhaust Stroke: Outlet valve open, Combustion gases go out after expansion, Inlet
valve closed.
Carnot cycle: it is a reversible thermodynamic cycle established by Sadi Carnot.
PV Diagram of Carnot cycle TS Diagram of Carnot cycle
Stroke length (L): the distance between TDC and BDC
Swept or Stroke volume (VS): the volume between TDC and BDC. ��=
4
D
2
L
Clearance Volume (Vc): the space between TDC cylinder head. VC = % VS
Volume of cylinder (V): V = Vc + VS
Compression ratio (r): the ratio of cylinder volume to the clearance volume.
�=
�
��
Mean Effective Pressure (mep): the ratio of net workdone to stroke
volume. ���=
��� ���� ����
������ ������
Internal Combustion engines: combustion takes place inside a cylinder.
1. Spark Ignition Engine (S.I. Engine)
Petrol is used as the fuel
Air and fuel (petrol) enter to cylinder and then compressed.
2. Compression Ignition Engines (C.I. Engines)
Diesel is used as the fuel
Only air enters to cylinder and then compressed.
4 stroke petrol engine: the stroke used in a 4 stroke engine are:
1. Suction or intake stroke: Inlet valve is opening, Air and petrol enter, outlet valve is
closed.
2. Compression Stroke: Both valves are closed, Both air and petrol are compressed.
3. Power or Expansion Stroke: Air and Petrol are Combustion, piston move down cause
expansion.
4. Exhaust Stroke: Outlet valve open, Combustion gases go out after expansion, Inlet
valve closed.
Carnot cycle: it is a reversible thermodynamic cycle established by Sadi Carnot.
PV Diagram of Carnot cycle TS Diagram of Carnot cycle
53
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Isothermal heat addition ( heat is added at
constant T)
Decreases Increases Constant Increases
2-3
Isentropic expansion (always com. and
exp. are Isentropic) Isentropic means the
heat transfer & change in entropy are zero
Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
3-4 Isothermal heat rejection (heat is rejected
at constant T)
Increases Decreases Constant Decreases
4-1 Isentropic expansion Increases Decreases Increases Constant
Property changes
Thermal Efficiency of a Carnot cycle: ȠCanot =
�
���
�
??????
=1−[
�
??????
�
??????
]
If ȠCanot > ȠInventor Claim is possible
If ȠCanot ≤ ȠInventor Claim is not possible
OTTO Cycle: it is also called Constant Volume cycle or Petrol Engine Cycle. It is the ideal cycle for S.I.
Engines.
PV Diagram of Otto cycle TS Diagram of Otto cycle
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Isentropic compression Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Isochoric heat addition (v=constant) Increases Constant Increases Increases
3-4 Isentropic expansion Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Isochoric heat Rejection (v=constant) Decreases Constant Decreases Decreases
Property changes
Thermal Efficiency of a OTTO cycle: Ƞth =
�
���
�
��
=1−[
�
���
�
��
]
Ƞotto =1−[
1
�
??????−1
] or 1−[
�
4
�
3
] , r=compression ratio= (v1/v2), ??????=specific heat ratio
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Isothermal heat addition ( heat is added at
constant T)
Decreases Increases Constant Increases
2-3
Isentropic expansion (always com. and
exp. are Isentropic) Isentropic means the
heat transfer & change in entropy are zero
Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
3-4 Isothermal heat rejection (heat is rejected
at constant T)
Increases Decreases Constant Decreases
4-1 Isentropic expansion Increases Decreases Increases Constant
Property changes
Thermal Efficiency of a Carnot cycle: ȠCanot =
�
���
�
??????
=1−[
�
??????
�
??????
]
If ȠCanot > ȠInventor Claim is possible
If ȠCanot ≤ ȠInventor Claim is not possible
OTTO Cycle: it is also called Constant Volume cycle or Petrol Engine Cycle. It is the ideal cycle for S.I.
Engines.
PV Diagram of Otto cycle TS Diagram of Otto cycle
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Isentropic compression Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Isochoric heat addition (v=constant) Increases Constant Increases Increases
3-4 Isentropic expansion Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Isochoric heat Rejection (v=constant) Decreases Constant Decreases Decreases
Property changes
Thermal Efficiency of a OTTO cycle: Ƞth =
�
���
�
��
=1−[
�
���
�
��
]
Ƞotto =1−[
1
�
??????−1
] or 1−[
�
4
�
3
] , r=compression ratio= (v1/v2), ??????=specific heat ratio
54
Diesel Cycle: It is the ideal cycle for C.I. Engines. It is for slow speed compression. The diesel cycle is
similar to the Otto cycle with only one change: heat is added at constant pressure in diesel and at
constant volume in Otto.
PV Diagram of Diesel cycle TS Diagram of Diesel cycle
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Isentropic compression Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Isobaric heat addition (p=constant) Constant Increases Increases Increases
3-4 Isentropic expansion Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Isochoric heat Rejection (v=constant) Decreases Constant Decreases Decreases
Property changes
Thermal Efficiency of a Diesel cycle: Ƞth =
�
���
�
��
=1−[
�
���
�
��
]
ȠDiesel =1−[
1
�
??????−1
][
�
??????−1
??????(�−1)
] , r=compression ratio= (v1/v2), ??????=specific heat ratio,(P-1)=0.06(??????-1)
Cut off ratio= v3/v2 Cut off Volume= v3-v2
Brayton Cycle: It is the ideal cycle for Gas Turbine. Heat is added and rejected at constant pressure. It
is used in aircraft propulsion and electric power generation.
Property changes
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Isentropic compression Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Isobaric heat addition (p=constant) Constant Increases Increases Increases
3-4 Isentropic expansion Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Isobaric heat Rejection (p=constant) Constant Decreases Decreases Decreases
Diesel Cycle: It is the ideal cycle for C.I. Engines. It is for slow speed compression. The diesel cycle is
similar to the Otto cycle with only one change: heat is added at constant pressure in diesel and at
constant volume in Otto.
PV Diagram of Diesel cycle TS Diagram of Diesel cycle
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Isentropic compression Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Isobaric heat addition (p=constant) Constant Increases Increases Increases
3-4 Isentropic expansion Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Isochoric heat Rejection (v=constant) Decreases Constant Decreases Decreases
Property changes
Thermal Efficiency of a Diesel cycle: Ƞth =
�
���
�
��
=1−[
�
���
�
��
]
ȠDiesel =1−[
1
�
??????−1
][
�
??????−1
??????(�−1)
] , r=compression ratio= (v1/v2), ??????=specific heat ratio,(P-1)=0.06(??????-1)
Cut off ratio= v3/v2 Cut off Volume= v3-v2
Brayton Cycle: It is the ideal cycle for Gas Turbine. Heat is added and rejected at constant pressure. It
is used in aircraft propulsion and electric power generation.
Property changes
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Isentropic compression Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Isobaric heat addition (p=constant) Constant Increases Increases Increases
3-4 Isentropic expansion Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Isobaric heat Rejection (p=constant) Constant Decreases Decreases Decreases
55
Thermal Efficiency of a Brayton cycle: Ƞth =
�
���
�
��
=1−[
�
���
�
��
]
ȠBrayton =1−[
�
1
�
2
] = 1−[
�
1
�
2
]
??????−1
??????
= 1−
1
[�
�]
??????−1
??????
, ??????=specific heat ratio, rp= pressure ratio
Applications of Brayton Cycle Advantages of Brayton Cycle Disadvantages of Brayton Cycle
1. Aviation
2. Power generation
3. Oil and Gas industry
4. Marine propulsion
1. Light weight
2. No cooling water required
3. Low installation cost
4. Quick starting
1. Not self-starting
2. Low efficiency
3. Non irreversibility
4. Higher rotor speeds
Open Brayton cycle (Open cycle gas turbine) Closed Brayton cycle (Closed cycle gas turbine)
Working:
1. A fresh air enters into a compressor and after
compression passes to a combustion chamber.
2. Fuel and the higher pressure air are burn in
combustion chamber at constant pressure and
produce high temperature gases.
3. The high temperature gases sent to turbine and
expand to produce power.
4. The exhaust gases leave the turbine to atmosphere
at lower temperature and pressure.
Working:
1. A fresh air enters into a compressor and after
compression passes to a combustion chamber.
2. Fuel and the higher pressure air are burn in
combustion chamber at constant pressure and
produce high temperature gases.
3. The high temperature gases sent to turbine and
expand to produce power.
4. The gases leave the turbine to heat exchanger. It
reduces temperature by cooling and sent to
compressor to repeat the cycle.
Brayton cycle with Regenerator Brayton cycle with Reheat
Working:
1. A fresh air enters into a compressor and after
compression passes to regenerator to use exhaust
heat to increase temperature of air and then
passes to a combustion chamber.
2. Fuel and the higher pressure air are burn in
combustion chamber at constant pressure and
produce high temperature gases.
3. The high temperature gases sent to turbine and
expand to produce power.
4. The exhaust gases leave the turbine to atmosphere
at lower temperature and pressure.
Working:
1. A fresh air enters into a compressor and after
compression passes to a combustion chamber.
2. Fuel and the higher pressure air are burn in
combustion chamber at constant pressure and
produce high temperature gases.
3. The high temperature gases sent to LP turbine and
partial expand then passes to another combustion
chamber to reheat.
4. The high temperature gases return to HP turbine to
produce power.
5. The exhaust gases leave the turbine to atmosphere
at lower temperature and pressure.
Thermal Efficiency of a Brayton cycle: Ƞth =
�
���
�
��
=1−[
�
���
�
��
]
ȠBrayton =1−[
�
1
�
2
] = 1−[
�
1
�
2
]
??????−1
??????
= 1−
1
[�
�]
??????−1
??????
, ??????=specific heat ratio, rp= pressure ratio
Applications of Brayton Cycle Advantages of Brayton Cycle Disadvantages of Brayton Cycle
1. Aviation
2. Power generation
3. Oil and Gas industry
4. Marine propulsion
1. Light weight
2. No cooling water required
3. Low installation cost
4. Quick starting
1. Not self-starting
2. Low efficiency
3. Non irreversibility
4. Higher rotor speeds
Open Brayton cycle (Open cycle gas turbine) Closed Brayton cycle (Closed cycle gas turbine)
Working:
1. A fresh air enters into a compressor and after
compression passes to a combustion chamber.
2. Fuel and the higher pressure air are burn in
combustion chamber at constant pressure and
produce high temperature gases.
3. The high temperature gases sent to turbine and
expand to produce power.
4. The exhaust gases leave the turbine to atmosphere
at lower temperature and pressure.
Working:
1. A fresh air enters into a compressor and after
compression passes to a combustion chamber.
2. Fuel and the higher pressure air are burn in
combustion chamber at constant pressure and
produce high temperature gases.
3. The high temperature gases sent to turbine and
expand to produce power.
4. The gases leave the turbine to heat exchanger. It
reduces temperature by cooling and sent to
compressor to repeat the cycle.
Brayton cycle with Regenerator Brayton cycle with Reheat
Working:
1. A fresh air enters into a compressor and after
compression passes to regenerator to use exhaust
heat to increase temperature of air and then
passes to a combustion chamber.
2. Fuel and the higher pressure air are burn in
combustion chamber at constant pressure and
produce high temperature gases.
3. The high temperature gases sent to turbine and
expand to produce power.
4. The exhaust gases leave the turbine to atmosphere
at lower temperature and pressure.
Working:
1. A fresh air enters into a compressor and after
compression passes to a combustion chamber.
2. Fuel and the higher pressure air are burn in
combustion chamber at constant pressure and
produce high temperature gases.
3. The high temperature gases sent to LP turbine and
partial expand then passes to another combustion
chamber to reheat.
4. The high temperature gases return to HP turbine to
produce power.
5. The exhaust gases leave the turbine to atmosphere
at lower temperature and pressure.
56
Rankine Cycle: It is the ideal cycle for Steam Turbine. Heat is added and rejected at constant pressure.
Property changes
Principle components of Rankine cycle:
1. Pump: It is a device used to convert low pressure liquid to high pressure liquid.
2. Boiler: It is a device used to convert liquid to steam by heating.
3. Turbine: It is a device used to convert high pressure steam to low pressure steam.
4. Condenser: It is a device used to convert steam to liquid by condensing.
Working:
Pump (process 1-2): Pump pressured the liquid water which coming from the condenser to
going back to the boiler. Wpump, in = h2 - h1
Boiler (process 2-3): Liquid water enters the boiler and it heated to convert to steam. Qin=h3-h2
Turbine (process 3-4): Steam from the boiler, which has high temperature and pressure,
expands through the turbine to produce work and then is discharged to the condenser with
low pressure. Wturbine, out = h3 - h4
Condenser (process 4-1): Steam from the turbine converts to liquid water in the condenser.
Qout = h4 - h1
Methods to increase the efficiency of the Rankine cycle: Efficiency of Rankine Cycle is
increased by increasing the Boiler temperature or decreasing the condenser temperature.
Decreasing condenser pressure Superheating the steam Increasing the boiler pressure
When the pressure of condenser
decreased, the temperature will
decrease, so the efficiency of
cycle will also increase.
Increasing the heat added to
boiler without increasing
pressure.
When the pressure of boiler
increased, the temperature will
increase, so the efficiency of cycle
will also increase.
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Isentropic compression( in pump) Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Isobaric heat addition (p=constant) in boiler Constant Increases Increases Increases
3-4 Isentropic expansion (in turbine) Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Isobaric heat Rejection (p=constant) in
condenser
Constant Decreases Decreases Decreases
Rankine Cycle: It is the ideal cycle for Steam Turbine. Heat is added and rejected at constant pressure.
Property changes
Principle components of Rankine cycle:
1. Pump: It is a device used to convert low pressure liquid to high pressure liquid.
2. Boiler: It is a device used to convert liquid to steam by heating.
3. Turbine: It is a device used to convert high pressure steam to low pressure steam.
4. Condenser: It is a device used to convert steam to liquid by condensing.
Working:
Pump (process 1-2): Pump pressured the liquid water which coming from the condenser to
going back to the boiler. Wpump, in = h2 - h1
Boiler (process 2-3): Liquid water enters the boiler and it heated to convert to steam. Qin=h3-h2
Turbine (process 3-4): Steam from the boiler, which has high temperature and pressure,
expands through the turbine to produce work and then is discharged to the condenser with
low pressure. Wturbine, out = h3 - h4
Condenser (process 4-1): Steam from the turbine converts to liquid water in the condenser.
Qout = h4 - h1
Methods to increase the efficiency of the Rankine cycle: Efficiency of Rankine Cycle is
increased by increasing the Boiler temperature or decreasing the condenser temperature.
Decreasing condenser pressure Superheating the steam Increasing the boiler pressure
When the pressure of condenser
decreased, the temperature will
decrease, so the efficiency of
cycle will also increase.
Increasing the heat added to
boiler without increasing
pressure.
When the pressure of boiler
increased, the temperature will
increase, so the efficiency of cycle
will also increase.
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Isentropic compression( in pump) Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Isobaric heat addition (p=constant) in boiler Constant Increases Increases Increases
3-4 Isentropic expansion (in turbine) Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Isobaric heat Rejection (p=constant) in
condenser
Constant Decreases Decreases Decreases
57
Thermal Efficiency of Rankine cycle: Ƞth =
�
���
�
��
=1−[
�
���
�
��
]
ȠRankine =
�
??????−�
??????
ℎ
3−ℎ2
=1−[
ℎ
4−ℎ1
ℎ
3−ℎ2
]
Rankine cycle with reheat: Steam passes through the high pressure turbine to be reheated in
boiler and then pass through the low pressure turbine.
Qin= (h3-h2) + (h5-h4)
Qout= (h6-h1)
Ẇnet = Ẇout - Ẇin
= (ẆLPT + ẆHPT) - Ẇpump
ȠRankine =1−[
ℎ
6−ℎ1
(ℎ
3−ℎ2)(ℎ
5−ℎ4)
]
Rankine cycle with regenerative: the stream comes from the boiler passes into two ways, a part
passes through the high pressure turbine and fed to the open feed water heater (this is path 5→6)
and other part passes through the low pressure turbine to condenser.
Qin=h5-h4
Qout= h7-h1
Ẇnet = Ẇout - Ẇin
= ẆT – ( Ẇpump1 + Ẇpump2)
ȠRankine =1−[
ℎ
7−ℎ1
ℎ
5−ℎ4
]
Feed water heater: it is heat exchanger which uses the waste heat from exhaust gases to heat
the feed water before enter the boiler.
Combined Cycle Power Plants: it combines a Brayton Cycle on the top and a Rankine Cycle at the
bottom. The exhaust gas from gas turbine is recovered in heat recover steam generator (HRSG).
Comparison of Efficiency
Type Efficiency
Rankine 35
Brayton 20
Combined 45
Thermal Efficiency of Rankine cycle: Ƞth =
�
���
�
��
=1−[
�
���
�
��
]
ȠRankine =
�
??????−�
??????
ℎ
3−ℎ2
=1−[
ℎ
4−ℎ1
ℎ
3−ℎ2
]
Rankine cycle with reheat: Steam passes through the high pressure turbine to be reheated in
boiler and then pass through the low pressure turbine.
Qin= (h3-h2) + (h5-h4)
Qout= (h6-h1)
Ẇnet = Ẇout - Ẇin
= (ẆLPT + ẆHPT) - Ẇpump
ȠRankine =1−[
ℎ
6−ℎ1
(ℎ
3−ℎ2)(ℎ
5−ℎ4)
]
Rankine cycle with regenerative: the stream comes from the boiler passes into two ways, a part
passes through the high pressure turbine and fed to the open feed water heater (this is path 5→6)
and other part passes through the low pressure turbine to condenser.
Qin=h5-h4
Qout= h7-h1
Ẇnet = Ẇout - Ẇin
= ẆT – ( Ẇpump1 + Ẇpump2)
ȠRankine =1−[
ℎ
7−ℎ1
ℎ
5−ℎ4
]
Feed water heater: it is heat exchanger which uses the waste heat from exhaust gases to heat
the feed water before enter the boiler.
Combined Cycle Power Plants: it combines a Brayton Cycle on the top and a Rankine Cycle at the
bottom. The exhaust gas from gas turbine is recovered in heat recover steam generator (HRSG).
Comparison of Efficiency
Type Efficiency
Rankine 35
Brayton 20
Combined 45
58
Air Compressors: They are a mechanical device used for increasing
the pressure of air and store it in a high pressure vessel.
Applications of compressed air:
1. Dusting/Cleaning/ Drying machines
2. Inflation of tires
3. Operating tools in factories
4. Operating brakes of buses, trucks or other heavy vehicles
5. Operation of pneumatic valves in automated processing industries
6. Air conditioning & cooling tower
Classifications of compressors:
1. Based on principle of working
a) Positive Displacement Type
b) Centrifugal Type
2. Based on number of stages
a) Single stage: When the compressor compresses the air from
atmospheric pressure to discharge pressure in a single stage. It is used to
delivery pressure up to 5 bar.
b) Multi stage: When the compressor compresses the air from atmospheric
pressure to final discharge pressure in more than one step by using
more than one single stages of compressor. It is used to delivery
pressure more than 5 bar.
3. Based on capacity of compressors:
a) Low capacity compressors, having air delivery capacity up to 0.15 m
3
/s
b) Medium capacity compressors, having air delivery capacity between
0.15 & 5 m
3
/s
c) High capacity compressors, having air delivery capacity more than 5 m
3
/s
4. Based on highest pressure developed:
a) Low pressure compressor, having maximum pressure up to 1 bar.
b) Medium pressure compressor,having maximum pressure from 1 to 8 bar
c) High pressure compressor, having maximum pressure from 8 to 10 bar.
d) Super high pressure compressor, having maximum pressure more 10 bar
Work of compression – Three Methods: Compression of gas can be done in the following
methods:
Work of compression – Three Methods
Air Compressors: They are a mechanical device used for increasing
the pressure of air and store it in a high pressure vessel.
Applications of compressed air:
1. Dusting/Cleaning/ Drying machines
2. Inflation of tires
3. Operating tools in factories
4. Operating brakes of buses, trucks or other heavy vehicles
5. Operation of pneumatic valves in automated processing industries
6. Air conditioning & cooling tower
Classifications of compressors:
1. Based on principle of working
a) Positive Displacement Type
b) Centrifugal Type
2. Based on number of stages
a) Single stage: When the compressor compresses the air from
atmospheric pressure to discharge pressure in a single stage. It is used to
delivery pressure up to 5 bar.
b) Multi stage: When the compressor compresses the air from atmospheric
pressure to final discharge pressure in more than one step by using
more than one single stages of compressor. It is used to delivery
pressure more than 5 bar.
3. Based on capacity of compressors:
a) Low capacity compressors, having air delivery capacity up to 0.15 m
3
/s
b) Medium capacity compressors, having air delivery capacity between
0.15 & 5 m
3
/s
c) High capacity compressors, having air delivery capacity more than 5 m
3
/s
4. Based on highest pressure developed:
a) Low pressure compressor, having maximum pressure up to 1 bar.
b) Medium pressure compressor,having maximum pressure from 1 to 8 bar
c) High pressure compressor, having maximum pressure from 8 to 10 bar.
d) Super high pressure compressor, having maximum pressure more 10 bar
Work of compression – Three Methods: Compression of gas can be done in the following
methods:
Work of compression – Three Methods
59
1. Isothermal compression ( 1-2
''
): PV = C
If heat is added or taken away to maintain the gas at a constant temperature.
In practice, no compressor is isothermal (�
���=100%), because the temperature
of a gas rises when it is compressed.
Isothermal compression is more efficient than adiabatic compression because no
energy goes to raise the temperature of the gas; all energy input goes to raise the
gas pressure.
2. Polytropic compression ( 1-2 ): PV
n
= C
If gas is compressed, then cooled (in an intercooler), then compressed again.
To make compression more efficient it needs to be as close as possible to
isothermal. In practice, this is achieved by cooling the compressed gas several
times during compression.
It is less efficient than isothermal compression but more efficient than adiabatic.
3. Adiabatic compression ( 1-2
'
): PV
Ƴ
= C
If no heat is added or taken away during compression.
In practice, no compressor is adiabatic, because some heat is always lost to
surroundings.
It is used in a single stage of a centrifugal compressor to measure the
performance of machines.
Various Terms & Efficiencies Used in Air-Compressor:
a) Free Air Delivery: (F.A.D.): It is the volume flow rate of compressor expressed in
m3/min as reduced to intake pressure and temperature.
b) Volumetric efficiency: It is the ratio of volume of free air delivered per the swept
volume. �
���=
Volume of free air delivery
Swept Volume
=
�
�
�
�
c) Isothermal efficiency: It is the ratio of isothermal work to the actual indicated work.
�
���=
Isothermal work
Actual indicated work
, Actual indicated work: The area on P-V diagram.
e) Isentropic efficiency: It is the ratio of isentropic work of a compressor to the actual
work required by compression. This term is mostly used in refrigerant compressor.
�
���=
Isentropic work
Actual indicated work
d) Mechanical efficiency: It is the ratio of indicated power of compressor to the actual
shaft power of compressor. Shaft power of compressor means power required to be
given to its driving shaft.
�
���ℎ=
Indicated power
Actual shaft power
e) Clearance ratio: It is the ratio of clearance volume to the total swept volume of an air
compressor. It is denoted as K or C. �=
�
�
�
�
f) Pressure ratio: It is the ratio of discharge pressure to suction pressure of a compressor
Work of compression without clearance:
i. The area under the cycle diagram gives the net work done on the compressor.
ii. In case of an isothermal compression, i.e. compression without any rise in temperature,
compressor raises the pressure of air by decreasing of volume only, so work is least.
iii. In case of isentropic compression, compressor raises the pressure by decreasing of
volume of air and also due to rise in temperature thus more work is required.
1. Isothermal compression ( 1-2
''
): PV = C
If heat is added or taken away to maintain the gas at a constant temperature.
In practice, no compressor is isothermal (�
���=100%), because the temperature
of a gas rises when it is compressed.
Isothermal compression is more efficient than adiabatic compression because no
energy goes to raise the temperature of the gas; all energy input goes to raise the
gas pressure.
2. Polytropic compression ( 1-2 ): PV
n
= C
If gas is compressed, then cooled (in an intercooler), then compressed again.
To make compression more efficient it needs to be as close as possible to
isothermal. In practice, this is achieved by cooling the compressed gas several
times during compression.
It is less efficient than isothermal compression but more efficient than adiabatic.
3. Adiabatic compression ( 1-2
'
): PV
Ƴ
= C
If no heat is added or taken away during compression.
In practice, no compressor is adiabatic, because some heat is always lost to
surroundings.
It is used in a single stage of a centrifugal compressor to measure the
performance of machines.
Various Terms & Efficiencies Used in Air-Compressor:
a) Free Air Delivery: (F.A.D.): It is the volume flow rate of compressor expressed in
m3/min as reduced to intake pressure and temperature.
b) Volumetric efficiency: It is the ratio of volume of free air delivered per the swept
volume. �
���=
Volume of free air delivery
Swept Volume
=
�
�
�
�
c) Isothermal efficiency: It is the ratio of isothermal work to the actual indicated work.
�
���=
Isothermal work
Actual indicated work
, Actual indicated work: The area on P-V diagram.
e) Isentropic efficiency: It is the ratio of isentropic work of a compressor to the actual
work required by compression. This term is mostly used in refrigerant compressor.
�
���=
Isentropic work
Actual indicated work
d) Mechanical efficiency: It is the ratio of indicated power of compressor to the actual
shaft power of compressor. Shaft power of compressor means power required to be
given to its driving shaft.
�
���ℎ=
Indicated power
Actual shaft power
e) Clearance ratio: It is the ratio of clearance volume to the total swept volume of an air
compressor. It is denoted as K or C. �=
�
�
�
�
f) Pressure ratio: It is the ratio of discharge pressure to suction pressure of a compressor
Work of compression without clearance:
i. The area under the cycle diagram gives the net work done on the compressor.
ii. In case of an isothermal compression, i.e. compression without any rise in temperature,
compressor raises the pressure of air by decreasing of volume only, so work is least.
iii. In case of isentropic compression, compressor raises the pressure by decreasing of
volume of air and also due to rise in temperature thus more work is required.
60
iv. If some cooling is done, temperature rise will be less and also pressure rise will also be
less thus lesser work will be required.
T-S diagram P-V diagram
Work of compression with clearance:
Reciprocating compressor P-V diagram
Working
Compression (process 1-2): During this process, both suction and discharge valve remain
closed and compressor becomes a closed system. The piston moves inside the cylinder from
BDC to TDC, so pressure of air rises. The compression may happen theoretically as any of the
isentropic, isothermal or polytropic processes. In actual compressor it is always a polytropic
process and try to keep it as close to isothermal process as possible by external cooling. Piston
work is less in case of isothermal compression.
Compressed air discharge (process 2-3): When the pressure in the cylinder reaches to a
required value, discharge valve opens and compressor becomes an open system. Compressed
air is discharged to compressed air tank through the discharge valve. This process ends when
the piston reaches to the TDC.
Expansion of air in clearance volume (process 3-4): During this process, both suction and
discharge valve are closed and compressor becomes a closed system. The piston moves down
towards BDC and cylinder volume starts increasing. Due to increase in volume, pressure
iv. If some cooling is done, temperature rise will be less and also pressure rise will also be
less thus lesser work will be required.
T-S diagram P-V diagram
Work of compression with clearance:
Reciprocating compressor P-V diagram
Working
Compression (process 1-2): During this process, both suction and discharge valve remain
closed and compressor becomes a closed system. The piston moves inside the cylinder from
BDC to TDC, so pressure of air rises. The compression may happen theoretically as any of the
isentropic, isothermal or polytropic processes. In actual compressor it is always a polytropic
process and try to keep it as close to isothermal process as possible by external cooling. Piston
work is less in case of isothermal compression.
Compressed air discharge (process 2-3): When the pressure in the cylinder reaches to a
required value, discharge valve opens and compressor becomes an open system. Compressed
air is discharged to compressed air tank through the discharge valve. This process ends when
the piston reaches to the TDC.
Expansion of air in clearance volume (process 3-4): During this process, both suction and
discharge valve are closed and compressor becomes a closed system. The piston moves down
towards BDC and cylinder volume starts increasing. Due to increase in volume, pressure
61
decreases, but some high pressure air remains in the clearance volume which could not be
discharged. This clearance volume expands air polytropically or isothermally or isentropically
doing some work on piston. When pressure becomes below the outside normal air pressure,
suction valve opens and expansion process ends. This process is reverse of compression
process 1-2. Due to this process the effective suction of air is reduced and volumetric efficiency
becomes less than 1.
Suction of air (process 4-1): After opening of suction valve, atmospheric air is absorbed in the
cylinder. In this process, compressor becomes an open system. At the end of this process, the
theoretical work by compressor during one cycle is given by area inside the cycle 1-2-3-4. In
this way, when the piston is reciprocated continuously in the cylinder by rotating the
crankshaft with the help of an electric motor, it completes one working cycle in two strokes of
piston or one revolution of crankshaft.
Multistage Compression:
Multistage Compression P-V diagram
i. If the number of stages is increased, the compression process become nearly isothermal
and the compression work decreases.
ii. The pressure increased from P2 to P2' causes the volume reduces from (V1 – V4) to (V1 –
V4') with increased pressure ratio from (
�
2
�
1
) to (
�
2′
�
1
) .
iii. Low Pressure Cylinder: LP cylinder compresses the air from suction pressure (P1) to
intermediate pressure (P2).
iv. High Pressure Cylinder: HP cylinder compresses the air from intermediate pressure (P2)
to discharge pressure (P2').
v. Advantages of multistage compression
1) (Save Power): The air can be cooled at intermediate pressure between the
stages of compression, thus decreasing the work required for next stage.
2) Multistage compressors have better mechanical balance. So lighter flywheel is
required.
3) The pressure and temperature range kept within desirable limits to improved
lubrication, Improved volumetric efficiency, and Reduced losses due to air
leakage.
vi. Disadvantages
1) The multistage compressor with intercoolers is more expensive than a single
stage.
decreases, but some high pressure air remains in the clearance volume which could not be
discharged. This clearance volume expands air polytropically or isothermally or isentropically
doing some work on piston. When pressure becomes below the outside normal air pressure,
suction valve opens and expansion process ends. This process is reverse of compression
process 1-2. Due to this process the effective suction of air is reduced and volumetric efficiency
becomes less than 1.
Suction of air (process 4-1): After opening of suction valve, atmospheric air is absorbed in the
cylinder. In this process, compressor becomes an open system. At the end of this process, the
theoretical work by compressor during one cycle is given by area inside the cycle 1-2-3-4. In
this way, when the piston is reciprocated continuously in the cylinder by rotating the
crankshaft with the help of an electric motor, it completes one working cycle in two strokes of
piston or one revolution of crankshaft.
Multistage Compression:
Multistage Compression P-V diagram
i. If the number of stages is increased, the compression process become nearly isothermal
and the compression work decreases.
ii. The pressure increased from P2 to P2' causes the volume reduces from (V1 – V4) to (V1 –
V4') with increased pressure ratio from (
�
2
�
1
) to (
�
2′
�
1
) .
iii. Low Pressure Cylinder: LP cylinder compresses the air from suction pressure (P1) to
intermediate pressure (P2).
iv. High Pressure Cylinder: HP cylinder compresses the air from intermediate pressure (P2)
to discharge pressure (P2').
v. Advantages of multistage compression
1) (Save Power): The air can be cooled at intermediate pressure between the
stages of compression, thus decreasing the work required for next stage.
2) Multistage compressors have better mechanical balance. So lighter flywheel is
required.
3) The pressure and temperature range kept within desirable limits to improved
lubrication, Improved volumetric efficiency, and Reduced losses due to air
leakage.
vi. Disadvantages
1) The multistage compressor with intercoolers is more expensive than a single
stage.
62
Refrigeration and air conditioning:
Refrigeration is any process of heat removal to reduce and maintain the temperature in a
region the temperature of the surrounding. Or the transfer of heat from lower temperature
regions to higher temperature regions.
Refrigerators: They are devices which produce refrigerating effect and cycles on which they
operate are called refrigerator cycles.
Refrigerant: The working fluids used for carrying heat away.
Refrigeration can be open cycle or closed cycle:
1) In open cycle, the refrigerant passes through the system once for refrigerating
the space and is thrown away as it gets polluted.
2) In closed cycle, the refrigerant flows inside tubes during refrigerating the space
and it does not get polluted.
Applications of refrigeration: It is used for preserving medicine, blood, food, etc.
Air conditioning: Refrigerating a region in reference to the human comfort.
Applications of air conditioning: It is used in buildings, hospitals, offices, working spaces,
vehicles, trains, aero planes, etc.
Heat pump is the device which runs exactly similar to the refrigerator but its purpose is to
maintain the body at temperature higher than that of surroundings
Different methods for refrigeration:
1. Refrigeration by evaporation: Refrigeration effect can be done by evaporation of
liquid. Examples: Cooling of water kept in (earthen pot or desert bag).
2. Refrigeration by ice: In this kind of refrigeration, ice is kept in the insulated box.
3. Refrigeration by expansion of air: The expansion of air is the cooling air due to
reduction in its temperature.
4. Refrigeration by throttling process: Throttling of gases show the reduction in
temperature of gas after throttling.
5. Refrigeration by dry ice: Dry ice is used in packaging of frozen foods for maintaining
them at low temperature.
6. Refrigeration using liquid gases: Liquid gases such as liquid nitrogen and liquid carbon
dioxide are used for refrigeration in refrigerated cargo vehicles.
7. Vapor Refrigeration system: Vapor refrigeration system based on vapor compression
refrigeration system and vapor absorption refrigeration system.
Performance Parameter:
a) Refrigerator’s performance is given by coefficient of performance (COP).
b) COP of refrigerator is the ratio of refrigeration effect and network done
upon refrigerator. ���=
�
2
�
=
�
2
(�
1−�
2
)
c) COP of refrigerator may have any magnitude i.e. less than unity or
greater than unity (1).
Refrigerator
d) Performance of heat pump is also given by the parameter defined like
COP but instead of calling it COP, it is called energy performance ratio (EPR)
e) ���=
�
1
�
=
�
1
(�
1−�
2
)
,��� = ��� +1
f) EPR will always have its magnitude greater than unity (1).
Heat Pump
Refrigeration and air conditioning:
Refrigeration is any process of heat removal to reduce and maintain the temperature in a
region the temperature of the surrounding. Or the transfer of heat from lower temperature
regions to higher temperature regions.
Refrigerators: They are devices which produce refrigerating effect and cycles on which they
operate are called refrigerator cycles.
Refrigerant: The working fluids used for carrying heat away.
Refrigeration can be open cycle or closed cycle:
1) In open cycle, the refrigerant passes through the system once for refrigerating
the space and is thrown away as it gets polluted.
2) In closed cycle, the refrigerant flows inside tubes during refrigerating the space
and it does not get polluted.
Applications of refrigeration: It is used for preserving medicine, blood, food, etc.
Air conditioning: Refrigerating a region in reference to the human comfort.
Applications of air conditioning: It is used in buildings, hospitals, offices, working spaces,
vehicles, trains, aero planes, etc.
Heat pump is the device which runs exactly similar to the refrigerator but its purpose is to
maintain the body at temperature higher than that of surroundings
Different methods for refrigeration:
1. Refrigeration by evaporation: Refrigeration effect can be done by evaporation of
liquid. Examples: Cooling of water kept in (earthen pot or desert bag).
2. Refrigeration by ice: In this kind of refrigeration, ice is kept in the insulated box.
3. Refrigeration by expansion of air: The expansion of air is the cooling air due to
reduction in its temperature.
4. Refrigeration by throttling process: Throttling of gases show the reduction in
temperature of gas after throttling.
5. Refrigeration by dry ice: Dry ice is used in packaging of frozen foods for maintaining
them at low temperature.
6. Refrigeration using liquid gases: Liquid gases such as liquid nitrogen and liquid carbon
dioxide are used for refrigeration in refrigerated cargo vehicles.
7. Vapor Refrigeration system: Vapor refrigeration system based on vapor compression
refrigeration system and vapor absorption refrigeration system.
Performance Parameter:
a) Refrigerator’s performance is given by coefficient of performance (COP).
b) COP of refrigerator is the ratio of refrigeration effect and network done
upon refrigerator. ���=
�
2
�
=
�
2
(�
1−�
2
)
c) COP of refrigerator may have any magnitude i.e. less than unity or
greater than unity (1).
Refrigerator
d) Performance of heat pump is also given by the parameter defined like
COP but instead of calling it COP, it is called energy performance ratio (EPR)
e) ���=
�
1
�
=
�
1
(�
1−�
2
)
,��� = ��� +1
f) EPR will always have its magnitude greater than unity (1).
Heat Pump
63
Unit of Refrigeration:
a) The unit of refrigeration called ‘Ton’ of refrigeration.
b) Ton of refrigeration defined as a cooling power needed to freeze 1 ton (2000 lb) of
0℃ (32℉) water to ice during 1 day (24 hours).
c) 1 Ton of refrigeration = mass of water × latent heat at 0℃ from water to ice (in SI
units). =
(1000×334.5)
24
��ℎ�⁄ =
(1000×334.5)
24×3600
�����⁄=3.5 ��/��� �� ��
Carnot Refrigeration Cycle:
a) Carnot cycle can use for getting the refrigeration effect upon its reversal.
Reversed Carnot cycle for refrigeration
b) Here, the refrigerated body is to be maintained at low temperature Tl for which heat
Ql should be removed at constant rate and rejected to surroundings at high
temperature Th. Amount of heat rejected to surroundings is Qh while the net work
done upon refrigerator is W.
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Reversible adiabatic compression Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Reversible isothermal heat
rejection (Qh) at temperature Th
Increases Decreases Constant Decreases
3-4 Reversible adiabatic expansion Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Reversible isothermal heat
addition (Q l )at temperature Tl
Decreases Increases Constant Increases
Property changes
c) The coefficient of performance of Carnot refrigerator:
���
������=
�
�
W
=[
�
�
�
ℎ
]−1=[
�
1
�
3
]−1
COP of refrigerator shall be more during cold days as compared to hot days.
COPcold days > COPhot days , because Th, cold days < Th, hot days
Air Refrigeration Cycle (Bell-Coleman cycle):
a) Bell-Coleman cycle based refrigerators are used in cargo ships.
b) Refrigeration system on this cycle has a compressor, heat exchanger, expander and
refrigeration unit.
c) Bell-Coleman cycle is actually the reversed Brayton cycle.
d) Advantages of air refrigeration:
1) They use air as refrigerant which is cheap, noninflammable and non-toxic.
2) They are light weight per ton of refrigeration compared to other refrigeration
systems
3) Leakage of air refrigerant may not be dangerous problem.
e) Disadvantages of air refrigeration:
1) They have lower COP compared to other refrigeration systems.
2) Quantity of air refrigerant required is more compared to other refrigerants.
Unit of Refrigeration:
a) The unit of refrigeration called ‘Ton’ of refrigeration.
b) Ton of refrigeration defined as a cooling power needed to freeze 1 ton (2000 lb) of
0℃ (32℉) water to ice during 1 day (24 hours).
c) 1 Ton of refrigeration = mass of water × latent heat at 0℃ from water to ice (in SI
units). =
(1000×334.5)
24
��ℎ�⁄ =
(1000×334.5)
24×3600
�����⁄=3.5 ��/��� �� ��
Carnot Refrigeration Cycle:
a) Carnot cycle can use for getting the refrigeration effect upon its reversal.
Reversed Carnot cycle for refrigeration
b) Here, the refrigerated body is to be maintained at low temperature Tl for which heat
Ql should be removed at constant rate and rejected to surroundings at high
temperature Th. Amount of heat rejected to surroundings is Qh while the net work
done upon refrigerator is W.
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Reversible adiabatic compression Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Reversible isothermal heat
rejection (Qh) at temperature Th
Increases Decreases Constant Decreases
3-4 Reversible adiabatic expansion Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Reversible isothermal heat
addition (Q l )at temperature Tl
Decreases Increases Constant Increases
Property changes
c) The coefficient of performance of Carnot refrigerator:
���
������=
�
�
W
=[
�
�
�
ℎ
]−1=[
�
1
�
3
]−1
COP of refrigerator shall be more during cold days as compared to hot days.
COPcold days > COPhot days , because Th, cold days < Th, hot days
Air Refrigeration Cycle (Bell-Coleman cycle):
a) Bell-Coleman cycle based refrigerators are used in cargo ships.
b) Refrigeration system on this cycle has a compressor, heat exchanger, expander and
refrigeration unit.
c) Bell-Coleman cycle is actually the reversed Brayton cycle.
d) Advantages of air refrigeration:
1) They use air as refrigerant which is cheap, noninflammable and non-toxic.
2) They are light weight per ton of refrigeration compared to other refrigeration
systems
3) Leakage of air refrigerant may not be dangerous problem.
e) Disadvantages of air refrigeration:
1) They have lower COP compared to other refrigeration systems.
2) Quantity of air refrigerant required is more compared to other refrigerants.
64
Bell Coleman cycle based refrigeration system Bell Coleman cycle
f) Working:
(Process 1-2): Adiabatic compression of air causing rise in its pressure and
temperature inside compressor.
(Process 2-3): Isobaric heat rejection inside heat exchanger causing cooling of high
pressure and high temperature air coming from compressor and making it low
temperature and high pressure air. Water may be used as cooling fluid inside heat
exchanger.
(Process 3-4): Adiabatic expansion inside expander causing cooling of high pressure
and low temperature air coming from heat exchanger and making it low temperature
and high pressure air.
(Process 4-1): Isobaric heat addition inside refrigeration unit causing heating low
temperature cool air coming from expander and making it high temperature air and
leaves to compressor. Thus, process (4–1) is the actual process which is giving the
refrigeration effect.
Property changes
g) The coefficient of performance of refrigerator:
���
���� �������=
������� ������ (�
��������)
��� ���� ( �)
,�ℎ���,�=(�
��������−�
��������),
�
��������=��
� (�
2 – �
3) , �
��������=��
� (�
1 – �
4)
Since T2 > T3 so, COPBell Coleman < COPCarnot
Vapor Compression Cycles:
a) It has the refrigerant (in gas/vapor) being circulated in closed circuit through
compressor, condenser, throttle valve or expansion valve and evaporator.
b) Refrigerant entering compressor is vapor in case of ‘dry compression’ and liquid-
vapor mixture in case of ‘wet compression’.
c) The dry compressor efficiency is more than that of wet compression.
d) Changes in kinetic energy and potential energy are negligible.
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Adiabatic compression ( in Compressor) Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Isobaric heat rejection (p=constant) in
heat exchanger
Constant Decreases Decreases Decreases
3-4 Adiabatic expansion (in Expander) Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Isobaric heat addition (p=constant) in
refrigeration unit
Constant Increases Increases Increases
Bell Coleman cycle based refrigeration system Bell Coleman cycle
f) Working:
(Process 1-2): Adiabatic compression of air causing rise in its pressure and
temperature inside compressor.
(Process 2-3): Isobaric heat rejection inside heat exchanger causing cooling of high
pressure and high temperature air coming from compressor and making it low
temperature and high pressure air. Water may be used as cooling fluid inside heat
exchanger.
(Process 3-4): Adiabatic expansion inside expander causing cooling of high pressure
and low temperature air coming from heat exchanger and making it low temperature
and high pressure air.
(Process 4-1): Isobaric heat addition inside refrigeration unit causing heating low
temperature cool air coming from expander and making it high temperature air and
leaves to compressor. Thus, process (4–1) is the actual process which is giving the
refrigeration effect.
Property changes
g) The coefficient of performance of refrigerator:
���
���� �������=
������� ������ (�
��������)
��� ���� ( �)
,�ℎ���,�=(�
��������−�
��������),
�
��������=��
� (�
2 – �
3) , �
��������=��
� (�
1 – �
4)
Since T2 > T3 so, COPBell Coleman < COPCarnot
Vapor Compression Cycles:
a) It has the refrigerant (in gas/vapor) being circulated in closed circuit through
compressor, condenser, throttle valve or expansion valve and evaporator.
b) Refrigerant entering compressor is vapor in case of ‘dry compression’ and liquid-
vapor mixture in case of ‘wet compression’.
c) The dry compressor efficiency is more than that of wet compression.
d) Changes in kinetic energy and potential energy are negligible.
State points Processes P V T S
1-2 Adiabatic compression ( in Compressor) Increases Decreases Increases Constant
2-3 Isobaric heat rejection (p=constant) in
heat exchanger
Constant Decreases Decreases Decreases
3-4 Adiabatic expansion (in Expander) Decreases Increases Decreases Constant
4-1 Isobaric heat addition (p=constant) in
refrigeration unit
Constant Increases Increases Increases
65
Vapor compression cycle based refrigeration system
Vapor compression cycle
e) Working
(Process 1-2 or 1'-2'): Isentropic compression of vapor in case of ‘dry compression’ or
liquid- vapor mixture in case of ‘wet compression’ causing rise in its pressure and
temperature inside compressor.
(Process 2-3 or 2'-3'): Isobaric heat rejection of high pressure and temperature of dry
or wet refrigerant causing converting of refrigerant into liquid form in condenser.
(Process 3-4 or 3'-4'): Isentropic expansion of liquid causing drop in its pressure and
temperature inside expander.
(Process 4-1 or 4'-1'): Isobaric heat absorption of liquid causing converting of liquid
into vapor in case of ‘dry compression’ or into liquid- vapor mixture in case of ‘wet
compression’ in evaporator.
Property changes
f) The coefficient of performance of heat pump: COP=
������� ������
��� ����
=
�
��������
Work input
�
�������� = �(ℎ
1 – ℎ
4),??????� ��� ��������??????��
�
�������� = �(ℎ
1′ – ℎ
4′),??????� ��� ��������??????��
�
����������= �(ℎ
2 – ℎ
1),??????� ��� ��������??????��
�
����������= �(ℎ
2′ – ℎ
1′),??????� ��� ��������??????��
State points Processes P h T S
1-2 or 1'-2' Isentropic compression ( in Compressor) Increases Increases Increases Constant
2-3 or 2'-3' Isobaric heat rejection (p=constant) in
Condenser
Constant Decreases Constant Decreases
3-4 or 3'-4' Isentropic expansion (in Expander) Decreases Constant Decreases Increases
4-1 or 4'-1' Isobaric heat absorption (p=constant) in
Evaporator
Constant Increases Constant Increases
Vapor compression cycle based refrigeration system
Vapor compression cycle
e) Working
(Process 1-2 or 1'-2'): Isentropic compression of vapor in case of ‘dry compression’ or
liquid- vapor mixture in case of ‘wet compression’ causing rise in its pressure and
temperature inside compressor.
(Process 2-3 or 2'-3'): Isobaric heat rejection of high pressure and temperature of dry
or wet refrigerant causing converting of refrigerant into liquid form in condenser.
(Process 3-4 or 3'-4'): Isentropic expansion of liquid causing drop in its pressure and
temperature inside expander.
(Process 4-1 or 4'-1'): Isobaric heat absorption of liquid causing converting of liquid
into vapor in case of ‘dry compression’ or into liquid- vapor mixture in case of ‘wet
compression’ in evaporator.
Property changes
f) The coefficient of performance of heat pump: COP=
������� ������
��� ����
=
�
��������
Work input
�
�������� = �(ℎ
1 – ℎ
4),??????� ��� ��������??????��
�
�������� = �(ℎ
1′ – ℎ
4′),??????� ��� ��������??????��
�
����������= �(ℎ
2 – ℎ
1),??????� ��� ��������??????��
�
����������= �(ℎ
2′ – ℎ
1′),??????� ��� ��������??????��
State points Processes P h T S
1-2 or 1'-2' Isentropic compression ( in Compressor) Increases Increases Increases Constant
2-3 or 2'-3' Isobaric heat rejection (p=constant) in
Condenser
Constant Decreases Constant Decreases
3-4 or 3'-4' Isentropic expansion (in Expander) Decreases Constant Decreases Increases
4-1 or 4'-1' Isobaric heat absorption (p=constant) in
Evaporator
Constant Increases Constant Increases
66
Multistage vapor compression cycle:
a) Compression for total compression ratio occurs in two stages i.e. LP compressor and
HP compressor.
Two stage intercooled vapor compression cycle with flash chamber T-s diagram
b) Working
(Process 1-2 adiabatic compression): Refrigerant is partly compressed in LP
compressor.
(Process 2-3): Compressed refrigerant leaving compressor is cooled by mixing it with
the cool vapor leaving flash chamber at state 9 and finally resulting low pressure
refrigerant at low temperature.
(Process 3-4 adiabatic compression): Refrigerant is compressed in HP compressor
upto state 4
(Process 4-5 Isobaric heat rejection in Condenser): High pressure refrigerant is
passed through condenser where it gets condensed into liquid form.
(Process 5-6 isentropic expansion (in Expansion valve 1): High pressure liquid is
passed through expansion valve 1 to yield low pressure and low temperature liquid.
(Process 6-7): Liquid vapor mixture produces inside flash chamber, so that liquid
passes into next expansion valve 2 at state 7 and the vapor leaves flash chamber at
state 9 for intercooling refrigerant in mixing box between state 2 and 3.
(Process 7-8 isentropic expansion (in Expansion valve 2): Liquid coming from flash
chamber is passed through expansion valve 2 to reduce its pressure and
temperature.
(Process 8-1 isobaric heat absorption in Evaporator): Low pressure liquid is passed
through evaporator and its phase transform from liquid to vapor by absorbing heat of
from the refrigerated space thereby showing cooling affect.
Heat pump systems:
a) Heat pump is a device used for maintaining a region or body at temperature more
than that of surroundings.
Multistage vapor compression cycle:
a) Compression for total compression ratio occurs in two stages i.e. LP compressor and
HP compressor.
Two stage intercooled vapor compression cycle with flash chamber T-s diagram
b) Working
(Process 1-2 adiabatic compression): Refrigerant is partly compressed in LP
compressor.
(Process 2-3): Compressed refrigerant leaving compressor is cooled by mixing it with
the cool vapor leaving flash chamber at state 9 and finally resulting low pressure
refrigerant at low temperature.
(Process 3-4 adiabatic compression): Refrigerant is compressed in HP compressor
upto state 4
(Process 4-5 Isobaric heat rejection in Condenser): High pressure refrigerant is
passed through condenser where it gets condensed into liquid form.
(Process 5-6 isentropic expansion (in Expansion valve 1): High pressure liquid is
passed through expansion valve 1 to yield low pressure and low temperature liquid.
(Process 6-7): Liquid vapor mixture produces inside flash chamber, so that liquid
passes into next expansion valve 2 at state 7 and the vapor leaves flash chamber at
state 9 for intercooling refrigerant in mixing box between state 2 and 3.
(Process 7-8 isentropic expansion (in Expansion valve 2): Liquid coming from flash
chamber is passed through expansion valve 2 to reduce its pressure and
temperature.
(Process 8-1 isobaric heat absorption in Evaporator): Low pressure liquid is passed
through evaporator and its phase transform from liquid to vapor by absorbing heat of
from the refrigerated space thereby showing cooling affect.
Heat pump systems:
a) Heat pump is a device used for maintaining a region or body at temperature more
than that of surroundings.
67
b) Heat pump is working similar to refrigerator with only different that the object of
heat pump maintains temperature more than surroundings but the object of
refrigerator maintains temperature less than surroundings temperature.
c) Heat pump systems can be based upon vapor compression cycle, absorption cycle
etc. and are used for space heating applications in local and industrial buildings.
d) Reversed Carnot cycle is the ideal cycle for heat pumps similar to the refrigerators.
Heat pump system based on vapor compression cycle
e) Working
(Process 1-2): Isentropic compression of refrigerant causing rise in its pressure and
temperature inside compressor
(Process 2-3): Isobaric heat rejection of high pressure and temperature of refrigerant
causing converting of refrigerant into liquid form in condenser and the space being
heated up.
(Process 3-4): Isentropic expansion of liquid causing drop in its pressure and
temperature inside expander.
(Process 4-1): Isobaric heat absorption of liquid from surroundings causing
converting of liquid into gas in evaporator.
f) COP of heat pump: ���
ℎ��� ����=
������� ������ (ℎ������ �� �����)
��� ����
=
�
��������
Work input
�
�������� = �(ℎ
2 – ℎ
3) , �
����������= �(ℎ
2 – ℎ
1)
Air conditioning systems:
a) Air conditioning is a device used for maintaining a space at desired temperature and
humidity.
b) Air conditioning systems require different arrangements depending upon the
atmospheric air condition and comfort condition requirement.
c) Summer air conditioning system for hot and dry outdoor condition (e.g. 44℃ & 20%
humidity).
d) Winter air conditioning system for cold & humid outdoor condition (e.g. 10℃ & 80%
humidity).
e) Comfort conditions desired temperature and humidity. E.g. 25℃ and 60% humidity.
b) Heat pump is working similar to refrigerator with only different that the object of
heat pump maintains temperature more than surroundings but the object of
refrigerator maintains temperature less than surroundings temperature.
c) Heat pump systems can be based upon vapor compression cycle, absorption cycle
etc. and are used for space heating applications in local and industrial buildings.
d) Reversed Carnot cycle is the ideal cycle for heat pumps similar to the refrigerators.
Heat pump system based on vapor compression cycle
e) Working
(Process 1-2): Isentropic compression of refrigerant causing rise in its pressure and
temperature inside compressor
(Process 2-3): Isobaric heat rejection of high pressure and temperature of refrigerant
causing converting of refrigerant into liquid form in condenser and the space being
heated up.
(Process 3-4): Isentropic expansion of liquid causing drop in its pressure and
temperature inside expander.
(Process 4-1): Isobaric heat absorption of liquid from surroundings causing
converting of liquid into gas in evaporator.
f) COP of heat pump: ���
ℎ��� ����=
������� ������ (ℎ������ �� �����)
��� ����
=
�
��������
Work input
�
�������� = �(ℎ
2 – ℎ
3) , �
����������= �(ℎ
2 – ℎ
1)
Air conditioning systems:
a) Air conditioning is a device used for maintaining a space at desired temperature and
humidity.
b) Air conditioning systems require different arrangements depending upon the
atmospheric air condition and comfort condition requirement.
c) Summer air conditioning system for hot and dry outdoor condition (e.g. 44℃ & 20%
humidity).
d) Winter air conditioning system for cold & humid outdoor condition (e.g. 10℃ & 80%
humidity).
e) Comfort conditions desired temperature and humidity. E.g. 25℃ and 60% humidity.
68
Summer air conditioning
f) Working:
(Process 1-2 in air filter): The atmospheric air across the air filter between 1 and 2 to
make the air clean.
(Process 2-3 in cooling coil): Air coming out from filter passes over cooling coil to
cool the air.
(Process 3-4 in humidifier): Cold air passes through humidifier where its humidity
increases.
(Process 4-5 in water eliminator): Large size water particles carried by air are
retained by water eliminator.
(Process 4-5): Air finally coming out at state 5 is sent to air conditioned space.
Winter air conditioning
g) Working:
(Process 1-2 in air filter): The atmospheric air across the air filter between 1 and 2 to
make the air clean.
(Process 2-3 in cooling coil): Air coming out from filter passes over first heating coil
to heat the air.
(Process 3-4 in humidifier): Hot air passes through humidifier where its humidity
increases.
(Process 4-5 in water eliminator): Large size water particles carried by air are
retained by water eliminator.
Summer air conditioning
f) Working:
(Process 1-2 in air filter): The atmospheric air across the air filter between 1 and 2 to
make the air clean.
(Process 2-3 in cooling coil): Air coming out from filter passes over cooling coil to
cool the air.
(Process 3-4 in humidifier): Cold air passes through humidifier where its humidity
increases.
(Process 4-5 in water eliminator): Large size water particles carried by air are
retained by water eliminator.
(Process 4-5): Air finally coming out at state 5 is sent to air conditioned space.
Winter air conditioning
g) Working:
(Process 1-2 in air filter): The atmospheric air across the air filter between 1 and 2 to
make the air clean.
(Process 2-3 in cooling coil): Air coming out from filter passes over first heating coil
to heat the air.
(Process 3-4 in humidifier): Hot air passes through humidifier where its humidity
increases.
(Process 4-5 in water eliminator): Large size water particles carried by air are
retained by water eliminator.
69
(Process 5-6 in 2
nd
heating coil): Air may again be passed through 2
nd
heating coil to
restore for temperature reduction in humidifier and achieve desired temperature.
(Process 6-7): Air finally coming out at state 5 is sent to air conditioned space.
Comparison of various refrigeration methods
a) Vapor compression COP is quite high while for air refrigeration COP is generally less
than unity.
b) Refrigerant required is smaller in vapor compression system because the heat is
carried away by latent heat of vapor and so the amount of liquid refrigerant
circulated per ton is less. Also size of evaporator is small.
c) Operating cost of vapor compression system is very less compared to air
refrigeration system.
SI. No Process Isobaric
P=Constant
Isochoric
V=Constant
Isothermal
T=Constant
Isentropic
S=Constant Detail
1 Index - n 0 Infinity 1 ??????
2
P-V-T relations
�
�
=��������
�
�
=��������
��
=��������
�
2
�
1
=[
�
1
�
2
]
??????
�
2
�
1
=[
�
1
�
2
]
??????−1
�
2
�
1
=[
�
2
�
1
]
??????−1
??????
3
Work done, W
∫���
2
1
�(�
2−�
1)
0
�
1�
1��[
�
2
�
1
]
�
1�
1−�
2�
2
??????−1
��(�
1−�
1)
??????−1
4 Heat Added
dQ
��
�(�
2−�
1) ��
�(�
2−�
1)
�
1�
1��[
�
2
�
1
]
0
5 Change in internal Energy
dU
��
�(�
2−�
1) ��
�(�
2−�
1) 0 ��
�(�
2−�
1)
6 Change in Enthalpy
dH
��
�(�
2−�
1) ��
�(�
2−�
1) 0 ��
�(�
2−�
1)
Property Relations for closed System
(Process 5-6 in 2
nd
heating coil): Air may again be passed through 2
nd
heating coil to
restore for temperature reduction in humidifier and achieve desired temperature.
(Process 6-7): Air finally coming out at state 5 is sent to air conditioned space.
Comparison of various refrigeration methods
a) Vapor compression COP is quite high while for air refrigeration COP is generally less
than unity.
b) Refrigerant required is smaller in vapor compression system because the heat is
carried away by latent heat of vapor and so the amount of liquid refrigerant
circulated per ton is less. Also size of evaporator is small.
c) Operating cost of vapor compression system is very less compared to air
refrigeration system.
SI. No Process Isobaric
P=Constant
Isochoric
V=Constant
Isothermal
T=Constant
Isentropic
S=Constant Detail
1 Index - n 0 Infinity 1 ??????
2
P-V-T relations
�
�
=��������
�
�
=��������
��
=��������
�
2
�
1
=[
�
1
�
2
]
??????
�
2
�
1
=[
�
1
�
2
]
??????−1
�
2
�
1
=[
�
2
�
1
]
??????−1
??????
3
Work done, W
∫���
2
1
�(�
2−�
1)
0
�
1�
1��[
�
2
�
1
]
�
1�
1−�
2�
2
??????−1
��(�
1−�
1)
??????−1
4 Heat Added
dQ
��
�(�
2−�
1) ��
�(�
2−�
1)
�
1�
1��[
�
2
�
1
]
0
5 Change in internal Energy
dU
��
�(�
2−�
1) ��
�(�
2−�
1) 0 ��
�(�
2−�
1)
6 Change in Enthalpy
dH
��
�(�
2−�
1) ��
�(�
2−�
1) 0 ��
�(�
2−�
1)
Property Relations for closed System
70
71
6.1 Magnetism
A magnet is an object which can attract or repel some objects such as iron pieces, bar magnet,
current carrying wire or coil, moving charges, etc.
The force exerted by a magnet is called magnetic force (Fm).
The region of space around a magnet in which an object experiences a magnetic force is called
magnetic field.
A moving charge produces magnetic field. A current carrying conductor produces a magnetic field.
a) Work done by a magnetic force on a moving charge is always zero.
b) Kinetic energy of the charge remains constant.
c) Speed of the charge remains constant (magnetic force changes only the direction of the
velocity of the charge and does not change its magnitude).
Poles of a magnet are the points where objects are most strongly attracted (or repelled).
a) Every magnet has two poles: a north pole and a south pole.
b) Like poles repel each other and unlike poles attract each other.
c) Magnetic poles always exist together and cannot be separated from each other. If a
magnet is cut in half, repeatedly, each half will have a north and a south pole.
magnetize and demagnetize:
d) There are many materials which can be magnetized either by induction or by prolonged
contact.
e) Soft magnetic materials can be magnetized and demagnetized easily. E.g., iron.
f) Hard magnetic materials are difficult to magnetize and demagnetize. E.g., cobalt, nickel.
Magnetic Force:
a) Lines of Magnetic Force:
i. The lines that are drawn to show the direction
of the magnetic force on a north pole are called
lines of magnetic force or magnetic lines.
ii. Outside the magnet, magnetic lines are from
the North Pole to the South Pole.
iii. Inside the magnet, magnetic lines are from the
South Pole to the North Pole.
b) Magnetic Force on a Moving Charge:
i. The magnetic force acting on a charged particle moving in a magnetic field is given as:
??????
�=������??????, q=electric charge, v=velocity of the charge, B=Magnetic Field, =angle
between v and B.
ii. Magnetic force F is always perpendicular to both v and B.
iii. F is maximum when = 90° (i.e. v and B are perpendicular)
iv. F is zero when = 0° (i.e. v and B are parallel).
v. The direction F is given by Right Hand Rule.
vi. Magnetic Field is given as: �=
�
�����??????
vii. SI unit of magnetic field is the tesla (T) and cgs unit is a gauss (G). [1 T = 10
4
G].
6.1 Magnetism
A magnet is an object which can attract or repel some objects such as iron pieces, bar magnet,
current carrying wire or coil, moving charges, etc.
The force exerted by a magnet is called magnetic force (Fm).
The region of space around a magnet in which an object experiences a magnetic force is called
magnetic field.
A moving charge produces magnetic field. A current carrying conductor produces a magnetic field.
a) Work done by a magnetic force on a moving charge is always zero.
b) Kinetic energy of the charge remains constant.
c) Speed of the charge remains constant (magnetic force changes only the direction of the
velocity of the charge and does not change its magnitude).
Poles of a magnet are the points where objects are most strongly attracted (or repelled).
a) Every magnet has two poles: a north pole and a south pole.
b) Like poles repel each other and unlike poles attract each other.
c) Magnetic poles always exist together and cannot be separated from each other. If a
magnet is cut in half, repeatedly, each half will have a north and a south pole.
magnetize and demagnetize:
d) There are many materials which can be magnetized either by induction or by prolonged
contact.
e) Soft magnetic materials can be magnetized and demagnetized easily. E.g., iron.
f) Hard magnetic materials are difficult to magnetize and demagnetize. E.g., cobalt, nickel.
Magnetic Force:
a) Lines of Magnetic Force:
i. The lines that are drawn to show the direction
of the magnetic force on a north pole are called
lines of magnetic force or magnetic lines.
ii. Outside the magnet, magnetic lines are from
the North Pole to the South Pole.
iii. Inside the magnet, magnetic lines are from the
South Pole to the North Pole.
b) Magnetic Force on a Moving Charge:
i. The magnetic force acting on a charged particle moving in a magnetic field is given as:
??????
�=������??????, q=electric charge, v=velocity of the charge, B=Magnetic Field, =angle
between v and B.
ii. Magnetic force F is always perpendicular to both v and B.
iii. F is maximum when = 90° (i.e. v and B are perpendicular)
iv. F is zero when = 0° (i.e. v and B are parallel).
v. The direction F is given by Right Hand Rule.
vi. Magnetic Field is given as: �=
�
�����??????
vii. SI unit of magnetic field is the tesla (T) and cgs unit is a gauss (G). [1 T = 10
4
G].
72
Nort
h
B
(Down)
South
v
(West
East
iv. Example: The magnetic field of the Earth at a certain location is directed vertically
downward and has a magnitude of 50 μT. A proton is moving horizontally toward the
west in this field with a speed of 6.20 × 10
6
m/s. Find the direction and magnitude of
the magnetic force acting on the proton.
Sol: Here B = 50 μT = 50 X 10
-6
T, q = 1.6 X 10
-19
C, v = 6.20 × 10
6
m/s, = 90
o
.
�
�=����??????��=(1.6×10
−19
)(6.2×10
6
)(50×10
−6
)(�??????�90)=496×10
−19
�
Using the set-2 for directions and right hand rule, the magnetic
force is towards south.
c) Magnetic Force on a Current Carrying Conductor:
i. The magnetic force acting on a current carrying wire (conductor) kept in a magnetic
field is given as: �
�=������??????, I = electric current in the wire, l = length of the wire,
B = Magnetic Field,= angle between Il and B.
ii. Magnetic force F is always perpendicular to
both Il and B.
iii. F is maximum when = 90° (i.e. Il and B are
perpendicular).
iv. F is zero when = 0° (i.e. Il and B are
parallel).
v. The direction F is given by Right Hand Rule.
vi. Example: A conductor suspended by two flexible wires as
shown in the figure has a mass per unit length of 0.04 kg/m.
Find the magnitude and direction of the current that must
exist in the conductor for the tension in the supporting wires
to be zero when the magnetic field is 3.6 T into the page.
Sol: Here, mass per unit length = m
l =0.04 kg/m, B = 3.6 T, = 90
o
.
For the tension in the supporting wires to be zero, �
�=�
� �� ������??????=�� 0 04 9 8
0 11
3 6 1
mg . X .
I = . A.
l B sinθ . X
Using the set-1 for directions and right hand rule, the current is from left to right.
Place :Right Hand Rule
right handof your fingers
in the direction of B,
thumb in the direction of
v, then direction of palm
gives the direction of F.
Nort
h
B
(Down)
South
v
(West
East
iv. Example: The magnetic field of the Earth at a certain location is directed vertically
downward and has a magnitude of 50 μT. A proton is moving horizontally toward the
west in this field with a speed of 6.20 × 10
6
m/s. Find the direction and magnitude of
the magnetic force acting on the proton.
Sol: Here B = 50 μT = 50 X 10
-6
T, q = 1.6 X 10
-19
C, v = 6.20 × 10
6
m/s, = 90
o
.
�
�=����??????��=(1.6×10
−19
)(6.2×10
6
)(50×10
−6
)(�??????�90)=496×10
−19
�
Using the set-2 for directions and right hand rule, the magnetic
force is towards south.
c) Magnetic Force on a Current Carrying Conductor:
i. The magnetic force acting on a current carrying wire (conductor) kept in a magnetic
field is given as: �
�=������??????, I = electric current in the wire, l = length of the wire,
B = Magnetic Field,= angle between Il and B.
ii. Magnetic force F is always perpendicular to
both Il and B.
iii. F is maximum when = 90° (i.e. Il and B are
perpendicular).
iv. F is zero when = 0° (i.e. Il and B are
parallel).
v. The direction F is given by Right Hand Rule.
vi. Example: A conductor suspended by two flexible wires as
shown in the figure has a mass per unit length of 0.04 kg/m.
Find the magnitude and direction of the current that must
exist in the conductor for the tension in the supporting wires
to be zero when the magnetic field is 3.6 T into the page.
Sol: Here, mass per unit length = m
l =0.04 kg/m, B = 3.6 T, = 90
o
.
For the tension in the supporting wires to be zero, �
�=�
� �� ������??????=�� 0 04 9 8
0 11
3 6 1
mg . X .
I = . A.
l B sinθ . X
Using the set-1 for directions and right hand rule, the current is from left to right.
Place :Right Hand Rule
right handof your fingers
in the direction of B,
thumb in the direction of
v, then direction of palm
gives the direction of F.
73
6.2 Waves
Wave:
The motion of a disturbance is called wave.
All waves carry energy and momentum.
Example of waves: Sound waves, waves on a string, Seismic waves (waves caused by
Earthquake), Electromagnetic waves such as radio waves, micro-waves, light waves, X-rays.
Types of Waves:
Transverse wave: The vibrations are perpendicular to the direction of the wave velocity.
Example: wave on a stretched string, light waves.
Longitudinal wave: The vibrations are parallel to the direction of the wave velocity.
Example: sound waves, Seismic waves, etc.
Mechanical Wave: A wave that can move only in medium and not in vacuum.
Example: sound waves, ultrasonic waves, infrasonic waves, Seismic waves, etc.
Non-mechanical Wave: A wave that can move in medium and vacuum both.
Example: em- waves, gravitational waves, matter waves, etc.
Frequency, Amplitude and Wavelength:
The time taken for one compete vibration is called Period (T).
[SI unit: second (s)]
Number of oscillations per second is called frequency (f).
[SI unit: hertz (Hz)]
The maximum distance a particle moves on one side of
equilibrium position is called amplitude (A) of the wave.
[SI unit: metre (m)]
The distance moved by the wave in one compete vibration is called wavelength ().
[SI unit: metre (m)]
The distance moved by the wave per second is called wave speed (v).
[SI unit: metre per second (m/s)]
Superposition of Waves:
• When two or more waves move through a medium at the same time, a new wave-form is
created due to the combined effect of all the waves. This is called
superposition of waves.
• The displacement due to resultant wave is sum of the displacements
due to the individual waves.
• Interference of Waves is the superposition of two or more waves of
constant phase difference.
• Constructive Interference occurs if the phase difference is 0 or 2
rad.
• Maxima are the points where amplitude is maximum due to
constructive interference. Amplitude of a maximum is
• Destructive Interference occurs if the phase difference is rad.
• Minima are the points where amplitude is minimum due to
destructive interference. Amplitude of a minimum is
f = 1/T
v = f
y = y1+ y2+ y3+ y4………….
Amax = A1 + A2
Amin = A1 – A2
6.2 Waves
Wave:
The motion of a disturbance is called wave.
All waves carry energy and momentum.
Example of waves: Sound waves, waves on a string, Seismic waves (waves caused by
Earthquake), Electromagnetic waves such as radio waves, micro-waves, light waves, X-rays.
Types of Waves:
Transverse wave: The vibrations are perpendicular to the direction of the wave velocity.
Example: wave on a stretched string, light waves.
Longitudinal wave: The vibrations are parallel to the direction of the wave velocity.
Example: sound waves, Seismic waves, etc.
Mechanical Wave: A wave that can move only in medium and not in vacuum.
Example: sound waves, ultrasonic waves, infrasonic waves, Seismic waves, etc.
Non-mechanical Wave: A wave that can move in medium and vacuum both.
Example: em- waves, gravitational waves, matter waves, etc.
Frequency, Amplitude and Wavelength:
The time taken for one compete vibration is called Period (T).
[SI unit: second (s)]
Number of oscillations per second is called frequency (f).
[SI unit: hertz (Hz)]
The maximum distance a particle moves on one side of
equilibrium position is called amplitude (A) of the wave.
[SI unit: metre (m)]
The distance moved by the wave in one compete vibration is called wavelength ().
[SI unit: metre (m)]
The distance moved by the wave per second is called wave speed (v).
[SI unit: metre per second (m/s)]
Superposition of Waves:
• When two or more waves move through a medium at the same time, a new wave-form is
created due to the combined effect of all the waves. This is called
superposition of waves.
• The displacement due to resultant wave is sum of the displacements
due to the individual waves.
• Interference of Waves is the superposition of two or more waves of
constant phase difference.
• Constructive Interference occurs if the phase difference is 0 or 2
rad.
• Maxima are the points where amplitude is maximum due to
constructive interference. Amplitude of a maximum is
• Destructive Interference occurs if the phase difference is rad.
• Minima are the points where amplitude is minimum due to
destructive interference. Amplitude of a minimum is
f = 1/T
v = f
y = y1+ y2+ y3+ y4………….
Amax = A1 + A2
Amin = A1 – A2
74
Sound waves:
Sound waves (or audible waves) are mechanical waves which produce sense of hearing in the
human ear.
Sound waves need medium to move (they cannot move in vacuum).
Range of frequency of sound waves, for a normal person, is from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
A mechanical wave having frequency below the audible range (below 20 Hz) is called infrasound
or infrasonic wave. Example: Seismic waves.
A mechanical wave having frequency above the audible range (above 20 kHz) is called
ultrasound or ultrasonic wave. Example: Waves produced by bats to catch insects, waves
produced by a dog-whistle.
Applications of Ultrasound (Ultrasonic Waves):
1. They are used for detecting defects in the IC engine blocks, girders, columns, and beams of
bridges and buildings, etc.
2. Widely used as a diagnostic and treatment tool in medicine.
3. Ultrasonic flow meter is used to measure blood flow.
4. Ultrasound can be used to produce images of small objects like babies in the womb.
Speed of Sound:
Speed of sound in a medium is given as �=√
�
�
Here, E=modulus of elasticity of medium, d=density of medium
For speed of sound, vsolid > vliquid > vgas
Speed of sound (v) in air at absolute temperature T is given as
�=(���)√
�
���??????
�/� (331 m/s is speed of sound in air at 0°C)
Electromagnetic Waves and Light:
Waves consisting of perpendicular electric and magnetic fields varying periodically with time
and space are called electromagnetic waves (in short em waves).
Example: X-rays, ultra-violet rays, light, infra-red rays, micro waves, radio waves, etc.
An electromagnetic wave which causes the sense of vision for human beings is called light.
All em waves having wavelength from 4000 Å to 7800 Å constitute light.
em waves having wavelength less than 4000 Å are called ultra-violet rays.
em waves having wavelength more than 7800 Å are called infra-red rays.
Properties of EM Waves:
1. The em waves are transverse waves.
2. em waves do not need medium to travel.
3. em waves travel with the speed of light c in vacuum.
4. The ratio of the electric field to the magnetic field is
equal to the speed of light in vacuum.
5. em waves show reflection, refraction, diffraction,
interference, polarization, scattering, etc.
6. em waves carry linear momentum and energy.
7. Energy carried by em waves is shared equally by the electric and magnetic fields. E
c
B
Sound waves:
Sound waves (or audible waves) are mechanical waves which produce sense of hearing in the
human ear.
Sound waves need medium to move (they cannot move in vacuum).
Range of frequency of sound waves, for a normal person, is from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
A mechanical wave having frequency below the audible range (below 20 Hz) is called infrasound
or infrasonic wave. Example: Seismic waves.
A mechanical wave having frequency above the audible range (above 20 kHz) is called
ultrasound or ultrasonic wave. Example: Waves produced by bats to catch insects, waves
produced by a dog-whistle.
Applications of Ultrasound (Ultrasonic Waves):
1. They are used for detecting defects in the IC engine blocks, girders, columns, and beams of
bridges and buildings, etc.
2. Widely used as a diagnostic and treatment tool in medicine.
3. Ultrasonic flow meter is used to measure blood flow.
4. Ultrasound can be used to produce images of small objects like babies in the womb.
Speed of Sound:
Speed of sound in a medium is given as �=√
�
�
Here, E=modulus of elasticity of medium, d=density of medium
For speed of sound, vsolid > vliquid > vgas
Speed of sound (v) in air at absolute temperature T is given as
�=(���)√
�
���??????
�/� (331 m/s is speed of sound in air at 0°C)
Electromagnetic Waves and Light:
Waves consisting of perpendicular electric and magnetic fields varying periodically with time
and space are called electromagnetic waves (in short em waves).
Example: X-rays, ultra-violet rays, light, infra-red rays, micro waves, radio waves, etc.
An electromagnetic wave which causes the sense of vision for human beings is called light.
All em waves having wavelength from 4000 Å to 7800 Å constitute light.
em waves having wavelength less than 4000 Å are called ultra-violet rays.
em waves having wavelength more than 7800 Å are called infra-red rays.
Properties of EM Waves:
1. The em waves are transverse waves.
2. em waves do not need medium to travel.
3. em waves travel with the speed of light c in vacuum.
4. The ratio of the electric field to the magnetic field is
equal to the speed of light in vacuum.
5. em waves show reflection, refraction, diffraction,
interference, polarization, scattering, etc.
6. em waves carry linear momentum and energy.
7. Energy carried by em waves is shared equally by the electric and magnetic fields. E
c
B
75
n1v1 = n2v2
6.3 Reflection and Refraction of light
Reflection of Light:
If light is incident on a boundary separating two media, a part of the incident light goes back into
the first medium. This is called reflection of light.
The angle (θ1) made by the incident ray with the normal is
called angle of incidence.
The angle (θ1’) made by the reflected ray with the normal is
called angle of reflection.
The angle of reflection is equal to the angle of incidence θ1= θ1’
Note: The normal is a line drawn perpendicular to the surface
at the point where the incident ray strikes the surface.
Refraction of Light:
When light travels from one transparent medium to another transparent medium, the speed of
light changes causing bending in the path of light at the boundary. This is called refraction of
light.
The angle (θ1) made by the incident ray with the normal is called angle of incidence.
The angle (θ2) made by the refracted ray with the normal is
called angle of refraction.
The incident ray, the reflected ray, the refracted ray, and the
normal lie in the same plane.
As light travels from one medium to another, its speed and
wavelength change but frequency does not change.
The speed of light and the angle of refraction θ2 depends on the
properties of the medium.
Refractive Index (or Index of Refraction)
The ratio of the speed of light in vacuum to the speed of light in the given medium is called
refractive index of the medium.
Refractive Index,
no unit of refractive index (n)
For a vacuum, n = 1. For other media, n > 1
also
Here, v1 = speed of light in medium1, v2 = speed of light in medium 2
Snell’s Law of Refraction:
or
Here, θ1 = angle made by the light ray
with the normal in medium 1,
θ2 = angle made by the light ray with the
normal in medium 2,
n1 = refractive index of medium1,
n2 = refractive index of medium 2.
Incident
ray
Reflected
ray
n11 = n22
n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 sin n
constant
sin n
12
21
speed of light in vacuum c
n
speed of light in the medium v
n1v1 = n2v2
6.3 Reflection and Refraction of light
Reflection of Light:
If light is incident on a boundary separating two media, a part of the incident light goes back into
the first medium. This is called reflection of light.
The angle (θ1) made by the incident ray with the normal is
called angle of incidence.
The angle (θ1’) made by the reflected ray with the normal is
called angle of reflection.
The angle of reflection is equal to the angle of incidence θ1= θ1’
Note: The normal is a line drawn perpendicular to the surface
at the point where the incident ray strikes the surface.
Refraction of Light:
When light travels from one transparent medium to another transparent medium, the speed of
light changes causing bending in the path of light at the boundary. This is called refraction of
light.
The angle (θ1) made by the incident ray with the normal is called angle of incidence.
The angle (θ2) made by the refracted ray with the normal is
called angle of refraction.
The incident ray, the reflected ray, the refracted ray, and the
normal lie in the same plane.
As light travels from one medium to another, its speed and
wavelength change but frequency does not change.
The speed of light and the angle of refraction θ2 depends on the
properties of the medium.
Refractive Index (or Index of Refraction)
The ratio of the speed of light in vacuum to the speed of light in the given medium is called
refractive index of the medium.
Refractive Index,
no unit of refractive index (n)
For a vacuum, n = 1. For other media, n > 1
also
Here, v1 = speed of light in medium1, v2 = speed of light in medium 2
Snell’s Law of Refraction:
or
Here, θ1 = angle made by the light ray
with the normal in medium 1,
θ2 = angle made by the light ray with the
normal in medium 2,
n1 = refractive index of medium1,
n2 = refractive index of medium 2.
Incident
ray
Reflected
ray
n11 = n22
n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 sin n
constant
sin n
12
21
speed of light in vacuum c
n
speed of light in the medium v
76
2
C 1 2
1
n
sin for n n
n
Example 1: A laser beam is incident at an angle of 30° to the vertical onto a solution of corn syrup
in water. If the beam is refracted to 19.24° to the vertical, (a) what is the refractive index of the
syrup solution? Suppose the light is red, with wavelength 632.8 nm in a vacuum. Find its (b)
wavelength, (c) frequency, and (d) speed in the solution.
Sol:
(a) Here, angle of incidence, θ1=30°, angle of refraction, θ2=19.24°, & refractive index of air, n1=1
Using Snell’s Law, n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2, we get refractive index of the syrup solution as
1
21
2
30
1 1 517
19 24
sin sin
n n .
sin sin . .
(b) Here,1=632.8 nm, n1 = 1, n2 = 1.517 ∵ n11 = n22 ⇒ n
. . nm
n.
1
21
2
1
632 8 417 14
1 517
(c) For air, v = c = 3 X 10
8
m/s. v = ƒ λ gives
8
14
9
3 10
4 741 10
632 8 10
v
ƒ . Hz.
.
(d) Frequency of light does not change with medium. Speed of light in the solution is
14 9 8
4 741 10 417 14 10 1 978 10v ƒ . . . m / s.
When the light goes from rarer medium to denser medium, the ray
bends toward the normal.
⇒ Angle of Refraction is less than Angle of Incidence, i.e. θ2 < θ1
When the light goes from denser medium to rarer medium, the ray
bends away from the normal.
⇒ Angle of Refraction is greater than Angle of Incidence, i.e. θ2 > θ1
Critical angle: It is the angle of incidence in denser medium for which
the angle of refraction is 90°.
So, n1 sin θc = n2 sin 90 ⇒
Total Internal Reflection:
If the angle of incidence in denser medium is greater than
the critical angle, then light is completely reflected into
the denser medium. This is called Total Internal Reflection.
Total internal reflection can occur if light attempts to move
from a denser medium to a rarer medium.
Ray 5 shows Total Internal Reflection
Applications of Total Internal Reflection:
Optical Fibre is a very thin plastic or glass rod which can carry light from one place to another
using the principle of total internal reflection.
Uses of Optical Fiber:
1) Telecommunications
2) For the diagnosis and correction of medical problems.
2
C 1 2
1
n
sin for n n
n
Example 1: A laser beam is incident at an angle of 30° to the vertical onto a solution of corn syrup
in water. If the beam is refracted to 19.24° to the vertical, (a) what is the refractive index of the
syrup solution? Suppose the light is red, with wavelength 632.8 nm in a vacuum. Find its (b)
wavelength, (c) frequency, and (d) speed in the solution.
Sol:
(a) Here, angle of incidence, θ1=30°, angle of refraction, θ2=19.24°, & refractive index of air, n1=1
Using Snell’s Law, n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2, we get refractive index of the syrup solution as
1
21
2
30
1 1 517
19 24
sin sin
n n .
sin sin . .
(b) Here,1=632.8 nm, n1 = 1, n2 = 1.517 ∵ n11 = n22 ⇒ n
. . nm
n.
1
21
2
1
632 8 417 14
1 517
(c) For air, v = c = 3 X 10
8
m/s. v = ƒ λ gives
8
14
9
3 10
4 741 10
632 8 10
v
ƒ . Hz.
.
(d) Frequency of light does not change with medium. Speed of light in the solution is
14 9 8
4 741 10 417 14 10 1 978 10v ƒ . . . m / s.
When the light goes from rarer medium to denser medium, the ray
bends toward the normal.
⇒ Angle of Refraction is less than Angle of Incidence, i.e. θ2 < θ1
When the light goes from denser medium to rarer medium, the ray
bends away from the normal.
⇒ Angle of Refraction is greater than Angle of Incidence, i.e. θ2 > θ1
Critical angle: It is the angle of incidence in denser medium for which
the angle of refraction is 90°.
So, n1 sin θc = n2 sin 90 ⇒
Total Internal Reflection:
If the angle of incidence in denser medium is greater than
the critical angle, then light is completely reflected into
the denser medium. This is called Total Internal Reflection.
Total internal reflection can occur if light attempts to move
from a denser medium to a rarer medium.
Ray 5 shows Total Internal Reflection
Applications of Total Internal Reflection:
Optical Fibre is a very thin plastic or glass rod which can carry light from one place to another
using the principle of total internal reflection.
Uses of Optical Fiber:
1) Telecommunications
2) For the diagnosis and correction of medical problems.
77
V = Vo sint
I = Io sint
6.4 Ac Circuits
A current whose magnitude and direction changes periodically with time is called alternating
current or AC.
An AC circuit consists of AC generator (source) connected across a combination of circuit elements
(resistors, capacitors, inductors, etc.).
The output of AC generator is given as:
Here, ω = 2ƒ = angular frequency of AC, V = instantaneous voltage or voltage at time t,
Vo=maximum voltage or peak voltage or amplitude of voltage.
Current is the simplest possible alternating current. It is given as:
Here, I = instantaneous current or current at time t,
Io = maximum current or peak current or amplitude of current.
The average value of current and voltage over a complete cycle in an AC circuit is zero.
Instead of average value we find root mean square (rms) value of AC current and voltage.
rms Voltage: and rms Current:
Usually, rms values are used when discussing AC currents and voltages.
AC ammeters and voltmeters are designed to read rms values.
AC voltages and currents can be combined using arrows similar to the method for vectors and
such a diagram is called phasor diagram.
S. No. Quantity SI Unit S. No. Quantity SI Unit
1 Current (I) ampere (A) 6 Frequency (f) hertz (Hz)
2 Voltage (V) volt (V) 7
Angular Frequency
(ω)
radian/second (rad/s)
3 Resistance (R) ohm (??????) 8 Reactance (X) ohm (??????)
4 Inductance (L) henry (H) 9 Impedance (Z) ohm (??????)
5 Capacitance (C) farad (F) 10 Power (P) watt (W)
Resistor in an AC Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of an AC source and a resistor.
Voltage across the resistor is in phase with the current ( = 0).
Ohm’s Law in an AC circuit with a resistor (R) is given as
Vrms = Irms R also Vo = Io R
Phasor diagram for
an AC circuit with
.resistorly on
0
o
V
R I 2
o
rms o
V
V = = 0.707 V
2
o
rms o
V
V = = 0.707 V
V = Vo sint
I = Io sint
6.4 Ac Circuits
A current whose magnitude and direction changes periodically with time is called alternating
current or AC.
An AC circuit consists of AC generator (source) connected across a combination of circuit elements
(resistors, capacitors, inductors, etc.).
The output of AC generator is given as:
Here, ω = 2ƒ = angular frequency of AC, V = instantaneous voltage or voltage at time t,
Vo=maximum voltage or peak voltage or amplitude of voltage.
Current is the simplest possible alternating current. It is given as:
Here, I = instantaneous current or current at time t,
Io = maximum current or peak current or amplitude of current.
The average value of current and voltage over a complete cycle in an AC circuit is zero.
Instead of average value we find root mean square (rms) value of AC current and voltage.
rms Voltage: and rms Current:
Usually, rms values are used when discussing AC currents and voltages.
AC ammeters and voltmeters are designed to read rms values.
AC voltages and currents can be combined using arrows similar to the method for vectors and
such a diagram is called phasor diagram.
S. No. Quantity SI Unit S. No. Quantity SI Unit
1 Current (I) ampere (A) 6 Frequency (f) hertz (Hz)
2 Voltage (V) volt (V) 7
Angular Frequency
(ω)
radian/second (rad/s)
3 Resistance (R) ohm (??????) 8 Reactance (X) ohm (??????)
4 Inductance (L) henry (H) 9 Impedance (Z) ohm (??????)
5 Capacitance (C) farad (F) 10 Power (P) watt (W)
Resistor in an AC Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of an AC source and a resistor.
Voltage across the resistor is in phase with the current ( = 0).
Ohm’s Law in an AC circuit with a resistor (R) is given as
Vrms = Irms R also Vo = Io R
Phasor diagram for
an AC circuit with
.resistorly on
0
o
V
R I 2
o
rms o
V
V = = 0.707 V
2
o
rms o
V
V = = 0.707 V
78
Capacitor in an AC Circuit:
Consider a circuit containing a capacitor and an AC source.
Voltage across the capacitor lags behind the current by 90° ( = –90°).
Capacitive Reactance is the opposition to AC by capacitor.
It is given as (SI unit of XC = ohms).
Here, ω = angular frequency of AC and C = capacitance of the capacitor.
For a capacitor in an AC circuit, the rms voltage is given by Vrms = Irms Xc
Inductors in an AC Circuit
Consider an AC circuit with a source and an inductor.
Voltage across the inductor always leads the current by 90° ( = 90°).
The current in the circuit is impeded by the back emf of the inductor.
Inductive Reactance is the opposition to ac by an inductor.
It is given as (SI unit of XL = ohms).
Here ω = angular frequency of AC and L = inductance of the inductor.
For an inductor in an AC circuit, the rms voltage is given by Vrms = Irms XL
Phasor diagram for
an AC circuit with
.inductoronly
+ 90
o
V
L
I
Phasor diagram for
an AC circuit with
.capacitoronly
– 90
o
V
C
I C
1
X =
C
XL = L
Capacitor in an AC Circuit:
Consider a circuit containing a capacitor and an AC source.
Voltage across the capacitor lags behind the current by 90° ( = –90°).
Capacitive Reactance is the opposition to AC by capacitor.
It is given as (SI unit of XC = ohms).
Here, ω = angular frequency of AC and C = capacitance of the capacitor.
For a capacitor in an AC circuit, the rms voltage is given by Vrms = Irms Xc
Inductors in an AC Circuit
Consider an AC circuit with a source and an inductor.
Voltage across the inductor always leads the current by 90° ( = 90°).
The current in the circuit is impeded by the back emf of the inductor.
Inductive Reactance is the opposition to ac by an inductor.
It is given as (SI unit of XL = ohms).
Here ω = angular frequency of AC and L = inductance of the inductor.
For an inductor in an AC circuit, the rms voltage is given by Vrms = Irms XL
Phasor diagram for
an AC circuit with
.inductoronly
+ 90
o
V
L
I
Phasor diagram for
an AC circuit with
.capacitoronly
– 90
o
V
C
I C
1
X =
C
XL = L
79
RLC Series Circuit:
In a series RLC circuit a resistor, an inductor, and a capacitor are
connected in series across an AC source. The current in each circuit
element is the same at any time and varies sinusoidally with time.
Current and Voltage Relationship in an RLC Circuit:
Instantaneous voltage across the resistor is in phase with the current.
Instantaneous voltage across the inductor leads the current by 90°.
Instantaneous voltage across the capacitor lags the current by 90°.
Impedance of an AC Circuit:
Impedance is the net opposition to ac by a combination of resistors, inductors, and capacitors.
It is given as where = Reactance of the ac circuit.
The phase difference between voltage and current is given as
If = + ⇒ V leads I and if = – ⇒ V lags I
For a combination of resistors, inductors and capacitors in an AC circuit, the rms voltage is given
by Vrms = Irms Z
This can be regarded as a generalized form of Ohm’s Law for a series AC circuit.
Average Power Dissipated in an AC Circuit:
Here,
For a purely resistive AC circuit , = 0 ⇒ cos = 1 ⇒ P = Vrms Irms .
For a purely reactive AC circuit (R = 0 Z = X), = 90
o
⇒ cos = 0 ⇒ P = 0 .
Such a circuit is called watt-less circuit because no loss of power in the circuit.
–
V
I
+
V
I 22
Z R X
LC
X X X X
tan
R
P = Vrms Irms cos
R
cos
Z
RLC Series Circuit:
In a series RLC circuit a resistor, an inductor, and a capacitor are
connected in series across an AC source. The current in each circuit
element is the same at any time and varies sinusoidally with time.
Current and Voltage Relationship in an RLC Circuit:
Instantaneous voltage across the resistor is in phase with the current.
Instantaneous voltage across the inductor leads the current by 90°.
Instantaneous voltage across the capacitor lags the current by 90°.
Impedance of an AC Circuit:
Impedance is the net opposition to ac by a combination of resistors, inductors, and capacitors.
It is given as where = Reactance of the ac circuit.
The phase difference between voltage and current is given as
If = + ⇒ V leads I and if = – ⇒ V lags I
For a combination of resistors, inductors and capacitors in an AC circuit, the rms voltage is given
by Vrms = Irms Z
This can be regarded as a generalized form of Ohm’s Law for a series AC circuit.
Average Power Dissipated in an AC Circuit:
Here,
For a purely resistive AC circuit , = 0 ⇒ cos = 1 ⇒ P = Vrms Irms .
For a purely reactive AC circuit (R = 0 Z = X), = 90
o
⇒ cos = 0 ⇒ P = 0 .
Such a circuit is called watt-less circuit because no loss of power in the circuit.
–
V
I
+
V
I 22
Z R X
LC
X X X X
tan
R
P = Vrms Irms cos
R
cos
Z
80
6.5 Kinetic Theory of Gases
Properties of Ideal Gas:
1. The volume of a molecule of an ideal gas is zero.
2. Molecules move randomly in all possible directions inside the container.
3. There is no force between the molecules except during their collisions.
4. Molecules have only kinetic energy and do not have potential energy.
5. Ideal Gas cannot be liquefied.
Avogadro’s Hypothesis:
Equal volumes of gas at the same temperature and pressure contain same number of molecules.
Example: If gas 1 and gas 2 are at same temperature T and same pressure P and if their volumes
are also equal then N1 = N2. Here N1 = number of molecules of gas 1 and N2 = number of
molecules of gas 2.
The number of particles in a mole of a substance is called Avogadro’s Number (NA).
�
�=�.����
��
���������/���
Example: 12 g of carbon contains NA atoms.
Mass of an atom: �
����=
����� ����
�
�
Number of Moles of a Substance in a sample:
�=
���� �� ��� ������
����� ���� �� ��� ���������
=
�
�
Also �=
������ �� ��������� �� ��� ������
��������
′
�������
=
�
�
�
Ideal Gas Equation of State:
��=���
Here, P = pressure of the gas, V = volume of the gas,
R = the Universal Gas Constant (R = 8.31 J / mole.K),
T = absolute temperature of the gas,
n = number of moles of the gas.
From ideal gas equation of state, we get
Here, Pi = initial pressure of the gas, Pf = final pressure, Vi = initial volume of the gas, Vf = final
volume, Ti = initial absolute temperature of the gas, and Tf = final absolute temperature.
Example 3: A cylinder with a movable piston contains gas at a temperature of 27.0 °C, a volume
of 1.50 m
3
, and an absolute pressure of 0.200 × 10
5
Pa. What will be its final temperature if the
gas is compressed to 0.700 m
3
and the absolute pressure increases to 0.800 × 10
5
Pa?
Sol: Here Ti = 27.0 °C = 27 + 273.15 = 300.15 K, Vi = 1.50 m
3
, Pi = 0.200 × 10
5
Pa, Vf = 0.700 m
3
,
and Pf =0.800 × 10
5
Pa.
∵ff ii
fi
PV PV
TT
�
�
�
� �
�
�
� �
�
�
�=
�.�����
�
�.���
�.�����
�
�.��
���.��=���.�� ??????
ff ii
fi
PV PV
TT
6.5 Kinetic Theory of Gases
Properties of Ideal Gas:
1. The volume of a molecule of an ideal gas is zero.
2. Molecules move randomly in all possible directions inside the container.
3. There is no force between the molecules except during their collisions.
4. Molecules have only kinetic energy and do not have potential energy.
5. Ideal Gas cannot be liquefied.
Avogadro’s Hypothesis:
Equal volumes of gas at the same temperature and pressure contain same number of molecules.
Example: If gas 1 and gas 2 are at same temperature T and same pressure P and if their volumes
are also equal then N1 = N2. Here N1 = number of molecules of gas 1 and N2 = number of
molecules of gas 2.
The number of particles in a mole of a substance is called Avogadro’s Number (NA).
�
�=�.����
��
���������/���
Example: 12 g of carbon contains NA atoms.
Mass of an atom: �
����=
����� ����
�
�
Number of Moles of a Substance in a sample:
�=
���� �� ��� ������
����� ���� �� ��� ���������
=
�
�
Also �=
������ �� ��������� �� ��� ������
��������
′
�������
=
�
�
�
Ideal Gas Equation of State:
��=���
Here, P = pressure of the gas, V = volume of the gas,
R = the Universal Gas Constant (R = 8.31 J / mole.K),
T = absolute temperature of the gas,
n = number of moles of the gas.
From ideal gas equation of state, we get
Here, Pi = initial pressure of the gas, Pf = final pressure, Vi = initial volume of the gas, Vf = final
volume, Ti = initial absolute temperature of the gas, and Tf = final absolute temperature.
Example 3: A cylinder with a movable piston contains gas at a temperature of 27.0 °C, a volume
of 1.50 m
3
, and an absolute pressure of 0.200 × 10
5
Pa. What will be its final temperature if the
gas is compressed to 0.700 m
3
and the absolute pressure increases to 0.800 × 10
5
Pa?
Sol: Here Ti = 27.0 °C = 27 + 273.15 = 300.15 K, Vi = 1.50 m
3
, Pi = 0.200 × 10
5
Pa, Vf = 0.700 m
3
,
and Pf =0.800 × 10
5
Pa.
∵ff ii
fi
PV PV
TT
�
�
�
� �
�
�
� �
�
�
�=
�.�����
�
�.���
�.�����
�
�.��
���.��=���.�� ??????
ff ii
fi
PV PV
TT
81
Main Assumptions of Kinetic Theory of Gases:
1. The number of molecules in a gas is very large.
2. All the molecules of a gas are identical.
3. Gas molecules have only KE and do not have any PE.
4. Gas molecules move randomly in all possible directions.
5. Gas molecules obey Newton’s laws of motion.
6. Gas molecules interact only by short-range forces during elastic collisions.
7. Gas molecules make elastic collisions among themselves and with the walls of the container.
8. The average separation between the molecules is large compared to their size.
Using Kinetic Theory of Gases we get:
Average kinetic energy of a gas molecule: ??????�̅̅̅̅
��������=
�
�
��
�̅̅̅
=
�
�
??????
��
m=mass of the gas molecule, 2
v Average of the square of speed of all the molecules of the
gas,23
1 38 10
B
A
R
k . J / K
N Boltzmann’s constant, T = absolute temperature of the gas.
Temperature of the gas is proportional to the average kinetic energy of its molecules.
Total kinetic energy of all the molecules in the gas: ??????�
�����=
�
�
���
Pressure of an ideal gas: �=
�
�
(
�
�
)(
�
�
��
�̅̅̅
) or ��=�.� � ??????�̅̅̅̅
��������
Pressure of an ideal gas can be increased by:
1. Increasing the number of molecules per unit volume in the container.
2. Increasing the average KE of the molecules (by increasing the temperature of the gas).
Root-Mean-Square (rms) speed of the gas molecules: �
���=√
� �
� �
�
=√
� � �
�
At a given temperature, on an average, lighter molecules move faster, than heavier ones.
Example: A sealed cubical container 20.0 cm on a side contains three times Avogadro’s number
of molecules at a temperature of 20.0°C. Find force exerted by gas on one of the walls of
container.
Sol: Here, number of molecules in the gas, N= 3NA
A
N
n
N = 3.
Volume of gas, V = volume of cubical container = l
3
= (0.2)
3
m
3
.
From ideal gas law, PV = nRT 53 8 31 293
9 13 10
0 008
n R T .
P . Pa
V.
But, pressure, P = force/area. Here, area of a wall A = l
2
= (0.2)
2
m
3
.
P = F/A F = PA = 9.13 X 10
5
X (0.2)
2
= 3.65 X 10
4
N.
Internal Energy (U):
Internal energy of a gas is the sum of KE and PE
of all the molecules (or atoms) of the gas.
Internal energy of a monatomic gas is only due to
translational KE of its molecules,
U of a polyatomic gas is due to translational KE,
rotational KE, & vibrational KE of its molecules.
Main Assumptions of Kinetic Theory of Gases:
1. The number of molecules in a gas is very large.
2. All the molecules of a gas are identical.
3. Gas molecules have only KE and do not have any PE.
4. Gas molecules move randomly in all possible directions.
5. Gas molecules obey Newton’s laws of motion.
6. Gas molecules interact only by short-range forces during elastic collisions.
7. Gas molecules make elastic collisions among themselves and with the walls of the container.
8. The average separation between the molecules is large compared to their size.
Using Kinetic Theory of Gases we get:
Average kinetic energy of a gas molecule: ??????�̅̅̅̅
��������=
�
�
��
�̅̅̅
=
�
�
??????
��
m=mass of the gas molecule, 2
v Average of the square of speed of all the molecules of the
gas,23
1 38 10
B
A
R
k . J / K
N Boltzmann’s constant, T = absolute temperature of the gas.
Temperature of the gas is proportional to the average kinetic energy of its molecules.
Total kinetic energy of all the molecules in the gas: ??????�
�����=
�
�
���
Pressure of an ideal gas: �=
�
�
(
�
�
)(
�
�
��
�̅̅̅
) or ��=�.� � ??????�̅̅̅̅
��������
Pressure of an ideal gas can be increased by:
1. Increasing the number of molecules per unit volume in the container.
2. Increasing the average KE of the molecules (by increasing the temperature of the gas).
Root-Mean-Square (rms) speed of the gas molecules: �
���=√
� �
� �
�
=√
� � �
�
At a given temperature, on an average, lighter molecules move faster, than heavier ones.
Example: A sealed cubical container 20.0 cm on a side contains three times Avogadro’s number
of molecules at a temperature of 20.0°C. Find force exerted by gas on one of the walls of
container.
Sol: Here, number of molecules in the gas, N= 3NA
A
N
n
N = 3.
Volume of gas, V = volume of cubical container = l
3
= (0.2)
3
m
3
.
From ideal gas law, PV = nRT 53 8 31 293
9 13 10
0 008
n R T .
P . Pa
V.
But, pressure, P = force/area. Here, area of a wall A = l
2
= (0.2)
2
m
3
.
P = F/A F = PA = 9.13 X 10
5
X (0.2)
2
= 3.65 X 10
4
N.
Internal Energy (U):
Internal energy of a gas is the sum of KE and PE
of all the molecules (or atoms) of the gas.
Internal energy of a monatomic gas is only due to
translational KE of its molecules,
U of a polyatomic gas is due to translational KE,
rotational KE, & vibrational KE of its molecules.
82
6.6 Modern physics
Main Features of Modern Physics:
Matter and energy are inter-convertible which is described by Einstein’ mass-energy relation
E = mc
2
.
Matter and energy have dual nature:
Particle nature is described by quantities like mass (m) and momentum (p).
Wave nature is described by quantities like frequency (f) and wavelength ().
Usually we observe the particle nature of matter (e.g.: ball, atom, electron, etc.) and wave
nature of energy (e.g.: X-rays, light, radio-waves, etc.).
Waves related to matter are called Matter waves.
Particles related to energy are called Photons.
The energy, linear momentum, angular momentum, charge, etc. of molecules, atoms, protons,
neutrons, and electrons are quantized.
Values of velocity, distance, time, etc. depend on the relative motion of the object and
observer.
Plank’s Hypothesis:
Atoms emit and absorb energy in the form of particles, called photons.
An atom can emit or absorb only one photon at a time.
Energy of a photon is E = hf.
Here h is Plank’s constant (h=6.62 X 10
–34
J.s) & f is frequency of the wave that carries this
energy.
de-Broglie Hypothesis:
Matter has dual nature; sometimes it behaves like particle and sometimes like waves.
De-Broglie wavelength is given as: = h/p.
It is the wavelength of the matter waves for a particle having linear momentum p.
Lasers: It is an acronym of Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation.
Main conditions for laser action:
1. The excited state of the system must be a metastable state (its lifetime must be longer
than the lifetime of a normal excited state).
2. System must be in a state of population inversion (more atoms in an excited state than
in the ground state).
3. The emitted photons must be confined in the system long enough to allow them to
stimulate further emission from other excited atoms. This is achieved by using reflecting
mirrors as shown in the figure.
1. wave nature
2. particle nature.
6.6 Modern physics
Main Features of Modern Physics:
Matter and energy are inter-convertible which is described by Einstein’ mass-energy relation
E = mc
2
.
Matter and energy have dual nature:
Particle nature is described by quantities like mass (m) and momentum (p).
Wave nature is described by quantities like frequency (f) and wavelength ().
Usually we observe the particle nature of matter (e.g.: ball, atom, electron, etc.) and wave
nature of energy (e.g.: X-rays, light, radio-waves, etc.).
Waves related to matter are called Matter waves.
Particles related to energy are called Photons.
The energy, linear momentum, angular momentum, charge, etc. of molecules, atoms, protons,
neutrons, and electrons are quantized.
Values of velocity, distance, time, etc. depend on the relative motion of the object and
observer.
Plank’s Hypothesis:
Atoms emit and absorb energy in the form of particles, called photons.
An atom can emit or absorb only one photon at a time.
Energy of a photon is E = hf.
Here h is Plank’s constant (h=6.62 X 10
–34
J.s) & f is frequency of the wave that carries this
energy.
de-Broglie Hypothesis:
Matter has dual nature; sometimes it behaves like particle and sometimes like waves.
De-Broglie wavelength is given as: = h/p.
It is the wavelength of the matter waves for a particle having linear momentum p.
Lasers: It is an acronym of Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation.
Main conditions for laser action:
1. The excited state of the system must be a metastable state (its lifetime must be longer
than the lifetime of a normal excited state).
2. System must be in a state of population inversion (more atoms in an excited state than
in the ground state).
3. The emitted photons must be confined in the system long enough to allow them to
stimulate further emission from other excited atoms. This is achieved by using reflecting
mirrors as shown in the figure.
1. wave nature
2. particle nature.
83
Properties of Laser Light:
1. It is highly monochromatic.
2. It is highly intense.
3. It is highly directional.
4. It is highly coherent.
Photoelectric Effect:
1. When light of suitable frequency falls on a metallic
surface, electrons are emitted from the surface.
This is called the photoelectric effect.
2. The emitted electrons are called photoelectrons.
3. The kinetic energy of photoelectrons increases
with the frequency of the light.
4. The number of photoelectrons increases with the
intensity of the light.
5. Photoelectric effect shows particle nature of light.
X-Rays:
1. X-rays are electromagnetic radiations with very short
wavelengths (about 0.1 nm).
2. In an X-ray tube, electrons are emitted by heating a
filament.
3. These electrons are accelerated toward a dense metal
target that is held at a very high potential than the
filament.
4. X-rays are produced when very high-speed electrons
are retarded or stopped suddenly by a suitable target.
5. The high-speed electrons go deep into the atoms of the target and interact with their inner
electrons and nucleus.
6. X-rays can pass through dense objects like animal tissues, wood, plastics, thin metal sheets, etc.
7. X-rays show that the energy of electrons is quantized in an atom.
Properties of Laser Light:
1. It is highly monochromatic.
2. It is highly intense.
3. It is highly directional.
4. It is highly coherent.
Photoelectric Effect:
1. When light of suitable frequency falls on a metallic
surface, electrons are emitted from the surface.
This is called the photoelectric effect.
2. The emitted electrons are called photoelectrons.
3. The kinetic energy of photoelectrons increases
with the frequency of the light.
4. The number of photoelectrons increases with the
intensity of the light.
5. Photoelectric effect shows particle nature of light.
X-Rays:
1. X-rays are electromagnetic radiations with very short
wavelengths (about 0.1 nm).
2. In an X-ray tube, electrons are emitted by heating a
filament.
3. These electrons are accelerated toward a dense metal
target that is held at a very high potential than the
filament.
4. X-rays are produced when very high-speed electrons
are retarded or stopped suddenly by a suitable target.
5. The high-speed electrons go deep into the atoms of the target and interact with their inner
electrons and nucleus.
6. X-rays can pass through dense objects like animal tissues, wood, plastics, thin metal sheets, etc.
7. X-rays show that the energy of electrons is quantized in an atom.
84
85
7.1 Chemical Formulae and Equations
Chemistry is the science that studies the matter and its properties and changes.
Matter is anything that has a mass and occupies a space.
Isotope notation:
Every element in the periodic table is shortly represented
called as chemical symbol.
Mass number = A; Atomic number = Z; Element symbol = X
The isotopes of an element include all of those with the same
number of protons or atomic number but with different mass
numbers which is a change in the number of neutrons.
E.g. C
6
12
C
6
13
C
6
14
(Isotopes of the chemical element carbon)
E.g. C
6
12
: Atomic number Z = 6 = number of electrons = number of protons
No of electrons e
-
= 6 , No of protons p = 6
The Periodic Table:
Classification of Matter:
7.1 Chemical Formulae and Equations
Chemistry is the science that studies the matter and its properties and changes.
Matter is anything that has a mass and occupies a space.
Isotope notation:
Every element in the periodic table is shortly represented
called as chemical symbol.
Mass number = A; Atomic number = Z; Element symbol = X
The isotopes of an element include all of those with the same
number of protons or atomic number but with different mass
numbers which is a change in the number of neutrons.
E.g. C
6
12
C
6
13
C
6
14
(Isotopes of the chemical element carbon)
E.g. C
6
12
: Atomic number Z = 6 = number of electrons = number of protons
No of electrons e
-
= 6 , No of protons p = 6
The Periodic Table:
Classification of Matter:
86
Atoms and ions
Atoms are electrically neutral, because the number of protons and electrons are same.
a) The atom consists of a very small central nucleus.
1) Electron e
-
(have negative charge)
2) Protons p (have positive charge)
3) Neutrons n (no charge)
b) Arrangement or configurations of Electrons:
1) The electrons around an atom are defined “shell”
2) Shell can contain a maximum number of electrons.
3) Shell with the lowest energy fills first.
4) The maximum number of electrons in each shell
can be given by the formula: 2n
2
(n= Shell number).
5) E.g. Maximum number of electrons in shell 1 is 2
and in shell 2 is 8 etc.
6) E.g. the electronic configurations and the electronic
structure for Sodium.
Sodium: ��
��
��
, No. of e
-
= 11
1st. Shell 2nd. Shell 3rd Shell
2 8 1
An ion is an atom, or group of atoms, that has a net positive or negative charge.
E.g.: Ca
+
; 11 protons, 10 (11 - 1) electrons. Cl
-
; 17 protons, 18 (17 + 1) electrons.
Anion – ion with a negative charge – if a neutral atom gains one or more electrons it becomes
an anion. E.g.; Nonmetals.
�
� ���������
� �������
+ � �
⇒ �
−�
�� ���������
� �������
��
�� ���������
�� �������
+ � �
⇒ ��
−
�� ���������
�� �������
Has gained one electron Has gained two electrons
Cation – ion with a positive charge – if a neutral atom loses one or more electrons it becomes
a cation. E.g.; Metals.
��
�� ���������
�� �������
− � �
⇒ ��
+
�� ���������
�� �������
��
�� ���������
�� �������
− � �
⇒ ��
+�
�� ���������
�� �������
Has lost one electron Has lost two electrons
Rules for writing Formula:
Binary Ionic Compounds (type I) :
1) Every binary compound has 2 parts, First part is positive (Cation) and the second is
negative (anion).E.g: Aluminium oxides (Al2O3); Aluminium (Al
+3
) is positive & Oxygen (O
-2
)
is negative
2) The second part generally ends with "ide" (For single element only) or "ite and ate" (For
element in combination with Oxygen). E.g.: Chloride (Cl
-
), Oxide (O
-2
), Nitride (N
-3
),
Sulphide (S
-2
) and Sulphite (SO3)
-2
, Nitrite (NO2)
-
, Sulphate (SO4)
-2
, Nitrate (NO3)
-
,
Phosphate (PO4)
-3
.
3) Firstly write the chemical symbol for the first part (include charge as superscript) followed
by the chemical symbol for the last part (include charge as superscript). E.g. Aluminium
oxides Al
+3
and O
-2
.
4) Criss-Cross the valences (only the numbers) to obtain the subscripts. Example: ��
2
+3
�
3
−2
Note: Only the numbers are criss-crossed, not the charges.
Atoms and ions
Atoms are electrically neutral, because the number of protons and electrons are same.
a) The atom consists of a very small central nucleus.
1) Electron e
-
(have negative charge)
2) Protons p (have positive charge)
3) Neutrons n (no charge)
b) Arrangement or configurations of Electrons:
1) The electrons around an atom are defined “shell”
2) Shell can contain a maximum number of electrons.
3) Shell with the lowest energy fills first.
4) The maximum number of electrons in each shell
can be given by the formula: 2n
2
(n= Shell number).
5) E.g. Maximum number of electrons in shell 1 is 2
and in shell 2 is 8 etc.
6) E.g. the electronic configurations and the electronic
structure for Sodium.
Sodium: ��
��
��
, No. of e
-
= 11
1st. Shell 2nd. Shell 3rd Shell
2 8 1
An ion is an atom, or group of atoms, that has a net positive or negative charge.
E.g.: Ca
+
; 11 protons, 10 (11 - 1) electrons. Cl
-
; 17 protons, 18 (17 + 1) electrons.
Anion – ion with a negative charge – if a neutral atom gains one or more electrons it becomes
an anion. E.g.; Nonmetals.
�
� ���������
� �������
+ � �
⇒ �
−�
�� ���������
� �������
��
�� ���������
�� �������
+ � �
⇒ ��
−
�� ���������
�� �������
Has gained one electron Has gained two electrons
Cation – ion with a positive charge – if a neutral atom loses one or more electrons it becomes
a cation. E.g.; Metals.
��
�� ���������
�� �������
− � �
⇒ ��
+
�� ���������
�� �������
��
�� ���������
�� �������
− � �
⇒ ��
+�
�� ���������
�� �������
Has lost one electron Has lost two electrons
Rules for writing Formula:
Binary Ionic Compounds (type I) :
1) Every binary compound has 2 parts, First part is positive (Cation) and the second is
negative (anion).E.g: Aluminium oxides (Al2O3); Aluminium (Al
+3
) is positive & Oxygen (O
-2
)
is negative
2) The second part generally ends with "ide" (For single element only) or "ite and ate" (For
element in combination with Oxygen). E.g.: Chloride (Cl
-
), Oxide (O
-2
), Nitride (N
-3
),
Sulphide (S
-2
) and Sulphite (SO3)
-2
, Nitrite (NO2)
-
, Sulphate (SO4)
-2
, Nitrate (NO3)
-
,
Phosphate (PO4)
-3
.
3) Firstly write the chemical symbol for the first part (include charge as superscript) followed
by the chemical symbol for the last part (include charge as superscript). E.g. Aluminium
oxides Al
+3
and O
-2
.
4) Criss-Cross the valences (only the numbers) to obtain the subscripts. Example: ��
2
+3
�
3
−2
Note: Only the numbers are criss-crossed, not the charges.
87
5) The total positive valence + the total negative valence must equal to zero (an overall
charge of 0) Example: for water (H2O); (2 times +1) + (1 times –2) = 0
6) Use the lowest possible ratio of subscripts (similar to reducing fractions). E.g. ��
1
+2
�
1
−2
has subscripts of “1” and “1” NOT “2” and “2” .
7) Enclose all polyatomic ions in parentheses (leave the valence outside the parentheses).
(Do not use parentheses for monatomic ions). E.g. (��
4)
2
+1
�
1
−2
Cation Name Anion Name
H
+
Hydrogen H
-
Hydride
Li
+
Lithium F
-
Fluoride
Na
+
Sodium Cl
-
Chloride
K
+
Potassium Br
-
Bromide
Cs
+
Cesium I
-
Iodide
Be
+2
Beryllium O
-2
Oxide
Mg
+2
Magnesium S
-2
Sulfide
Ca
+2
Calcium N
-3
Nitride
Ba
+2
Barium P
-3
Phosphide
Al
+3
Aluminum
Ag
+
Silver
Common Monatomic Cations and Anions
Binary Ionic compounds (Type II):
1) They contain a transition metal ( except Zn
+2
, Ag
+
and
Cd
+2
) that can form more than one
type of cation chargeand form more than one type of ionic compound.
2) The cation is mentioned first then anion as in case of binary ionic compounds type I .
3) The charge on cation must be determined by balancing the positive and negative charges
of the compound. E.g. Co
+2
Br
-
; CoBr2 ; (1 times +2) + (2 times –1) = 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X XI XII XIII XIV XV XVI XVII XVIII XIX XX
Roman Numerals
Common Type II Cations
Note that mercury (I) ions always occurs bound together to form Hg2
+2
ions. Although
these are transition metals, they form only one type of ion, and a Roman numeral is not
used.
Compounds with Polyatomic Ions:
1) Polyatomic ions are groups of atoms that stay together and have a charge.
2) The cation is listed first and the anion second.
3) The polyatomic ion names must be memorized.
4) No extra suffixes are added.
Ion Systematic Name Ion Systematic Name
Fe
+3
Iron(III) Pb
+4
Lead(IV)
Fe
+2
Iron(II) Pb
+2
Lead(II)
Cu
+2
Copper(II) Hg
+2
Mercury(II)
Cu
+
Copper(I) Hg2
+2
Mercury(I)
Co
+3
Cobalt(III) Ag
+
Silver
Co
+2
Cobalt(II) Zn
+2
Zinc
Sn
+4
Tin(IV) Cd
+2
Cadmium
Sn
+2
Tin(II)
5) The total positive valence + the total negative valence must equal to zero (an overall
charge of 0) Example: for water (H2O); (2 times +1) + (1 times –2) = 0
6) Use the lowest possible ratio of subscripts (similar to reducing fractions). E.g. ��
1
+2
�
1
−2
has subscripts of “1” and “1” NOT “2” and “2” .
7) Enclose all polyatomic ions in parentheses (leave the valence outside the parentheses).
(Do not use parentheses for monatomic ions). E.g. (��
4)
2
+1
�
1
−2
Cation Name Anion Name
H
+
Hydrogen H
-
Hydride
Li
+
Lithium F
-
Fluoride
Na
+
Sodium Cl
-
Chloride
K
+
Potassium Br
-
Bromide
Cs
+
Cesium I
-
Iodide
Be
+2
Beryllium O
-2
Oxide
Mg
+2
Magnesium S
-2
Sulfide
Ca
+2
Calcium N
-3
Nitride
Ba
+2
Barium P
-3
Phosphide
Al
+3
Aluminum
Ag
+
Silver
Common Monatomic Cations and Anions
Binary Ionic compounds (Type II):
1) They contain a transition metal ( except Zn
+2
, Ag
+
and
Cd
+2
) that can form more than one
type of cation chargeand form more than one type of ionic compound.
2) The cation is mentioned first then anion as in case of binary ionic compounds type I .
3) The charge on cation must be determined by balancing the positive and negative charges
of the compound. E.g. Co
+2
Br
-
; CoBr2 ; (1 times +2) + (2 times –1) = 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X XI XII XIII XIV XV XVI XVII XVIII XIX XX
Roman Numerals
Common Type II Cations
Note that mercury (I) ions always occurs bound together to form Hg2
+2
ions. Although
these are transition metals, they form only one type of ion, and a Roman numeral is not
used.
Compounds with Polyatomic Ions:
1) Polyatomic ions are groups of atoms that stay together and have a charge.
2) The cation is listed first and the anion second.
3) The polyatomic ion names must be memorized.
4) No extra suffixes are added.
Ion Systematic Name Ion Systematic Name
Fe
+3
Iron(III) Pb
+4
Lead(IV)
Fe
+2
Iron(II) Pb
+2
Lead(II)
Cu
+2
Copper(II) Hg
+2
Mercury(II)
Cu
+
Copper(I) Hg2
+2
Mercury(I)
Co
+3
Cobalt(III) Ag
+
Silver
Co
+2
Cobalt(II) Zn
+2
Zinc
Sn
+4
Tin(IV) Cd
+2
Cadmium
Sn
+2
Tin(II)
88
Ion Name Ion Name
OH
-
Hydroxide CN
-
Cyanide
NO2
-
Nitrite PO4
-3
Phosphate
NO3
-
Nitrate NH
+4
Ammonium
SO3
-2
Sulfite Hg
+
Mercury(II); Mercurous
SO4
-2
Sulfate Hg2
+2
Mercury(I); Mercuric
HSO4
-
Bisulfate CO3
-2
Carbonate
MnO4
-
Permanganate HCO3
-
Bicarbonate
Common Polyatomic Ions
Binary Covalent Compounds (Type III):
1) Binary compound has 2 parts, First part is cation and the second is anion.
2) Covalent means Nonmetals are present.
3) Prefixes are used to denote the number of atoms present in cation and anion.
4) The prefix mono is never for naming the first element. E.g. CO2
5) Drop the final o or a of the prefix when the element begins with a vowel. E.g. N2O4
dinitrogen tetroxide.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
mono di tri tetra penta hexa hepta octa nona
Prefixes
Common Binary Covalent Compounds (Type III)
Naming of Binary Compounds
Number of atoms Prefix Example
1 mono NO: nitrogen monoxide
2 di NO2: nitrogen dioxide
3 tri N2O3: dinitrogen trioxide
4 tetra N2O4: dinitrogen tetraoxide
5 penta N2O5: dinitrogen pentaoxide
6 hexa SF6: Sulphur hexa fluoride
7 hepta IF7: iodine hepta fluoride
8 octa P4O8: tetra phosphor decoxide
9 nona P4S9: tetra phosphor nona sulphide
10 deca AS4O10: tetra arsenic decoxide
Ion Name Ion Name
OH
-
Hydroxide CN
-
Cyanide
NO2
-
Nitrite PO4
-3
Phosphate
NO3
-
Nitrate NH
+4
Ammonium
SO3
-2
Sulfite Hg
+
Mercury(II); Mercurous
SO4
-2
Sulfate Hg2
+2
Mercury(I); Mercuric
HSO4
-
Bisulfate CO3
-2
Carbonate
MnO4
-
Permanganate HCO3
-
Bicarbonate
Common Polyatomic Ions
Binary Covalent Compounds (Type III):
1) Binary compound has 2 parts, First part is cation and the second is anion.
2) Covalent means Nonmetals are present.
3) Prefixes are used to denote the number of atoms present in cation and anion.
4) The prefix mono is never for naming the first element. E.g. CO2
5) Drop the final o or a of the prefix when the element begins with a vowel. E.g. N2O4
dinitrogen tetroxide.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
mono di tri tetra penta hexa hepta octa nona
Prefixes
Common Binary Covalent Compounds (Type III)
Naming of Binary Compounds
Number of atoms Prefix Example
1 mono NO: nitrogen monoxide
2 di NO2: nitrogen dioxide
3 tri N2O3: dinitrogen trioxide
4 tetra N2O4: dinitrogen tetraoxide
5 penta N2O5: dinitrogen pentaoxide
6 hexa SF6: Sulphur hexa fluoride
7 hepta IF7: iodine hepta fluoride
8 octa P4O8: tetra phosphor decoxide
9 nona P4S9: tetra phosphor nona sulphide
10 deca AS4O10: tetra arsenic decoxide
89
Acids
1) Acids are substances that dissociate in water to produce hydrogen ions, H
+
(H3O
+
).
E.g. HCl + H2O → H3O
+
+ Cl
-
2) If the anion doesn't contain oxygen, the acid is named as hydro + (anion root + ic) + acid.
E.g. HCl ( hydrochloric acid ).
3) If the anion contains oxygen and the anion name ends with –ate, the acid is named as
(anion root + ic) + acid. E.g. HNO3 "Nitrate anion" (Nitric acid), H2CO3 "Carbonate anion"
(Carbonic acid), H2SO4 "Sulfate anion" (Sulfuric acid), H2PO4 "Phosphate anion"
(Phosphoric acid).
4) If the anion contains oxygen and the anion name ends with –ite, the acid is named as
(anion root + ous) + acid. E.g. HNO2 "Nitrite anion" (Nitrous acid), H3PO3 "Phosphite
anion" (Phosphorous acid).
Common acids that don't contain oxygen
Naming of Acids
Chemical reaction:
a) A chemical reaction is a process in which one or more substances are changed into one or
more new substances.
b) All chemical reactions have two parts: Reactants (the substances you start with) and Products
(the substances you end up with). E.g. Carbon and oxygen reacts to produce carbon dioxide;
Carbon + Oxygen → Carbon dioxide
Acid Name
HF Hydrofluoric acid
HCl Hydrochloric acid
HBr Hydrobromic acid
HI Hydroiodic acid
HCN Hydrocyanic acid
H2S Hydrosulfuric acid
Acids
1) Acids are substances that dissociate in water to produce hydrogen ions, H
+
(H3O
+
).
E.g. HCl + H2O → H3O
+
+ Cl
-
2) If the anion doesn't contain oxygen, the acid is named as hydro + (anion root + ic) + acid.
E.g. HCl ( hydrochloric acid ).
3) If the anion contains oxygen and the anion name ends with –ate, the acid is named as
(anion root + ic) + acid. E.g. HNO3 "Nitrate anion" (Nitric acid), H2CO3 "Carbonate anion"
(Carbonic acid), H2SO4 "Sulfate anion" (Sulfuric acid), H2PO4 "Phosphate anion"
(Phosphoric acid).
4) If the anion contains oxygen and the anion name ends with –ite, the acid is named as
(anion root + ous) + acid. E.g. HNO2 "Nitrite anion" (Nitrous acid), H3PO3 "Phosphite
anion" (Phosphorous acid).
Common acids that don't contain oxygen
Naming of Acids
Chemical reaction:
a) A chemical reaction is a process in which one or more substances are changed into one or
more new substances.
b) All chemical reactions have two parts: Reactants (the substances you start with) and Products
(the substances you end up with). E.g. Carbon and oxygen reacts to produce carbon dioxide;
Carbon + Oxygen → Carbon dioxide
Acid Name
HF Hydrofluoric acid
HCl Hydrochloric acid
HBr Hydrobromic acid
HI Hydroiodic acid
HCN Hydrocyanic acid
H2S Hydrosulfuric acid
90
c) Types of chemical reactions:
Reaction type Explanation General formula
Combination
Two or more compounds combine to form
one compound.
A + B → AB
Decomposition
The opposite of a combination reaction – a
complex molecule breaks down to make
simpler ones.
AB → A+ B
Precipitation
Two solutions of soluble salts are mixed,
resulting in an insoluble solid (precipitate)
forming.
A + soluble salt B →
precipitate + soluble salt C
Neutralization
An acid and a base reaction with each other.
Generally, the product of this reaction is a
salt and water.
Acid + salt → salt + water
Combustion
Oxygen combines with a compound to form
carbon dioxide and water. These reactions
are exothermic, meaning they give off heat.
A + O2 → H2O + CO2
Displacement
One element trades places with another
element in the compound.
A + BC → AC + B
Chemical equation:
a) Chemical equation is the symbolic representation of a chemical reaction.
E.g. Copper reacts with chlorine to form copper (II) chloride; Cu(s) + Cl2(g) → CuCl2(s)
b) Reactants and products may be Solids (s), Liquids (�), Gases (g), Solutions (aq).
c) The symbols used to indicate the state of the solids, liquids, gases or solutions are
called State Symbols. E.g. C(s) + O2 (g) → CO2(g)
Balanced Chemical Equations:
a) When the numbers of different atoms are the same on both sides, an equation is
said to be balanced. E.g. 2H2 (g) +O2 (g) → 2H2O (l)
b) An equation which is not balanced is not correct.
c) How to write balanced Chemical Equations:
1) Write the equation in words.
E.g. Calcium burns in chlorine to form a solid calcium chloride.
2) Write the equation using symbols and formula.
Calcium + Chlorine → Calcium Chloride; Ca + Cl2 → CaCl2
3) Make sure all the formulae are correct.
4) Check that the equation is balanced for each type of atom.
Left side (Ca: 1 Cl: 2), Right side (Ca: 1 Cl: 2), so the equation is balanced.
5) Make sure you do not change any formula.
6) Add the state symbols.
Ca (s) +Cl2 (g ) → CaCl2(s)
d) Rules for balancing chemical equations:
1) Write the correct formulas for all the reactants and products.
2) Count the number of atoms of each type on both sides.
3) Check to make sure it is balanced.
c) Types of chemical reactions:
Reaction type Explanation General formula
Combination
Two or more compounds combine to form
one compound.
A + B → AB
Decomposition
The opposite of a combination reaction – a
complex molecule breaks down to make
simpler ones.
AB → A+ B
Precipitation
Two solutions of soluble salts are mixed,
resulting in an insoluble solid (precipitate)
forming.
A + soluble salt B →
precipitate + soluble salt C
Neutralization
An acid and a base reaction with each other.
Generally, the product of this reaction is a
salt and water.
Acid + salt → salt + water
Combustion
Oxygen combines with a compound to form
carbon dioxide and water. These reactions
are exothermic, meaning they give off heat.
A + O2 → H2O + CO2
Displacement
One element trades places with another
element in the compound.
A + BC → AC + B
Chemical equation:
a) Chemical equation is the symbolic representation of a chemical reaction.
E.g. Copper reacts with chlorine to form copper (II) chloride; Cu(s) + Cl2(g) → CuCl2(s)
b) Reactants and products may be Solids (s), Liquids (�), Gases (g), Solutions (aq).
c) The symbols used to indicate the state of the solids, liquids, gases or solutions are
called State Symbols. E.g. C(s) + O2 (g) → CO2(g)
Balanced Chemical Equations:
a) When the numbers of different atoms are the same on both sides, an equation is
said to be balanced. E.g. 2H2 (g) +O2 (g) → 2H2O (l)
b) An equation which is not balanced is not correct.
c) How to write balanced Chemical Equations:
1) Write the equation in words.
E.g. Calcium burns in chlorine to form a solid calcium chloride.
2) Write the equation using symbols and formula.
Calcium + Chlorine → Calcium Chloride; Ca + Cl2 → CaCl2
3) Make sure all the formulae are correct.
4) Check that the equation is balanced for each type of atom.
Left side (Ca: 1 Cl: 2), Right side (Ca: 1 Cl: 2), so the equation is balanced.
5) Make sure you do not change any formula.
6) Add the state symbols.
Ca (s) +Cl2 (g ) → CaCl2(s)
d) Rules for balancing chemical equations:
1) Write the correct formulas for all the reactants and products.
2) Count the number of atoms of each type on both sides.
3) Check to make sure it is balanced.
91
4) Change the numbers in front of the formulas to make the number of
atoms of each element the same on both sides of the equation.
5) 6. Do not change the subscripts.
Example 1:
Ethane + Oxygen → Carbon Dioxide + Steam
C2H6 + O2 → CO2 + H2O
Step 1: Balance C atom, put 2 before CO2
C2H6 + O2 → 2CO2 + H2O
Step 2: Balance H atom, put 3 before H2O
C2H6 + O2 → 2CO2 + 3 H2O
Step 3: Balance O atom, put 7/2 before O2
C2H6 + 7/2 O2 → 2CO2 + 3 H2O
Step 4: Multiply the whole equation by 2 we get the balanced equation is
2 C2H6 + 7 O2 → 4 CO2 + 6 H2O
Mole Concept:
It is a unit for substance. It is the amount of substance containing the same number of particles
(atoms, molecules or ions), as there are atoms in exactly 12.00 grams of C-12
1 mole of any substance contains 6.02x10
23
particles.
a) 1 mole = NA = 6.02 x 10
23
, Avogadro’s number (NA).
b) N = n x NA , N = number of particles (atoms), n = number of moles, NA = Avogadro’s constant
c) E.g 1: 1 mole of hydrogen atoms has a mass of 1 gram and contains 6 X 10
23
atoms or
molecules.
E.g 2: 2 moles of oxygen atoms have a mass of 32 grams and contain 12 X 10
23
atoms or
molecules.
Atomic mass is the mass of an atom in atomic mass units (amu). E.g.
1
H = 1.008 amu
a) Relative Atomic Mass (??????��)=
���� �� ��� ���� �� ������� (�)
������ �� ����� (�)
g/mole or amu
b) Actual masses of atoms are very small. E.g. hydrogen actual mass is 1.66 X 10
-24
g, but the
relative atomic mass (RAM) is 1.008 amu.
c) Relative molecular mass (RMM) is the sum of relative atomic masses (RAM) of the atoms.
d) ??????��=
���� �� ��� �������� �� ��� �������� (�)
������ �� ����� (�)
g/mole or amu
E.g. RMM of SO2: 1S=32.07 amu, 2O=2*16=32 amu, RMM of SO2=64.07 amu.
Molar Volume:
a) Volume occupied by 1 mole of any gas at standard temperature and pressure (s.t.p) is always
the same and equals to 22.4 dm
3
.
b) Molar Volume = 22.4 dm
3
/ mole
c) E.g. the amount of moles presents in the volumes 12.4 dm
3
of helium gas at s.t.p.
1 mol → 22.4 dm
3
Moles of Helium = (12.4dm
3
x1 mol) / 22.4 dm
3
x mol of He → 12.4 dm
3
= 0.554 mol
4) Change the numbers in front of the formulas to make the number of
atoms of each element the same on both sides of the equation.
5) 6. Do not change the subscripts.
Example 1:
Ethane + Oxygen → Carbon Dioxide + Steam
C2H6 + O2 → CO2 + H2O
Step 1: Balance C atom, put 2 before CO2
C2H6 + O2 → 2CO2 + H2O
Step 2: Balance H atom, put 3 before H2O
C2H6 + O2 → 2CO2 + 3 H2O
Step 3: Balance O atom, put 7/2 before O2
C2H6 + 7/2 O2 → 2CO2 + 3 H2O
Step 4: Multiply the whole equation by 2 we get the balanced equation is
2 C2H6 + 7 O2 → 4 CO2 + 6 H2O
Mole Concept:
It is a unit for substance. It is the amount of substance containing the same number of particles
(atoms, molecules or ions), as there are atoms in exactly 12.00 grams of C-12
1 mole of any substance contains 6.02x10
23
particles.
a) 1 mole = NA = 6.02 x 10
23
, Avogadro’s number (NA).
b) N = n x NA , N = number of particles (atoms), n = number of moles, NA = Avogadro’s constant
c) E.g 1: 1 mole of hydrogen atoms has a mass of 1 gram and contains 6 X 10
23
atoms or
molecules.
E.g 2: 2 moles of oxygen atoms have a mass of 32 grams and contain 12 X 10
23
atoms or
molecules.
Atomic mass is the mass of an atom in atomic mass units (amu). E.g.
1
H = 1.008 amu
a) Relative Atomic Mass (??????��)=
���� �� ��� ���� �� ������� (�)
������ �� ����� (�)
g/mole or amu
b) Actual masses of atoms are very small. E.g. hydrogen actual mass is 1.66 X 10
-24
g, but the
relative atomic mass (RAM) is 1.008 amu.
c) Relative molecular mass (RMM) is the sum of relative atomic masses (RAM) of the atoms.
d) ??????��=
���� �� ��� �������� �� ��� �������� (�)
������ �� ����� (�)
g/mole or amu
E.g. RMM of SO2: 1S=32.07 amu, 2O=2*16=32 amu, RMM of SO2=64.07 amu.
Molar Volume:
a) Volume occupied by 1 mole of any gas at standard temperature and pressure (s.t.p) is always
the same and equals to 22.4 dm
3
.
b) Molar Volume = 22.4 dm
3
/ mole
c) E.g. the amount of moles presents in the volumes 12.4 dm
3
of helium gas at s.t.p.
1 mol → 22.4 dm
3
Moles of Helium = (12.4dm
3
x1 mol) / 22.4 dm
3
x mol of He → 12.4 dm
3
= 0.554 mol
92
Concentration:
The concentration of a solution is the amount of solute present in a given quantity of solvent or
solution.
A solution is a homogenous mixture of 2 or more substances (Solvent + Solute).
A solute is the substance that dissolved into a solvent and it presents in the smaller amount.
A solvent is the substance that dissolved the solute substance and it presents in the larger
amount.
E.g. Solvent (N2) + Solute (O2 , Ar , CO2) → Solution (Air(g))
Solvent (H2O) + Solute (CO2 , Sugar) → Solution (Soft drink(l))
Types of Solutions:
Component 1 Component 2 State of Resulting Solution Examples
Gas Gas Gas Air
Gas Liquid Liquid Soda water (CO2 in water )
Gas Solid Solid H2 gas in palladium
Liquid Liquid Liquid Ethanol in water
Solid Liquid Liquid NaCl (salt) in water
Solid Solid Solid Brass (Cu/Zn), Solder (Sn/Pb)
Methods express the concentration:
1) Molarity:
a) It is the number of moles of solutes dissolved in one liter of solution.
b) Symbol used for molarity is M.
c) Molarity (M) =
�� �� ����� �� ������� (���)
������ �� �������� (��
3
)
=
���� �� ������
������ �� ��������
=
�
�
���/��
3
E.g.1 What is the concentration of a solution which is made by dissolving 0.5 mole
of NaOH in 200cm
3
of solution?
No of moles of NaOH n =0.5 mole
Volume of solution (V) = 200cm
3
1 dm
3
= 1000 cm
3
200cm
3
=
200/ 1000 = 0.2
dm
3
Now apply the formula for concentration
�=�/�
M =0.50 mole/0.20 dm
3
= 2.5M
E.g.2 Calculate the concentration of 6.3g of silver nitrate (AgNO3) in 0.05 dm
3
water.
First find the no of moles of AgNO3
�=�/���
RMM = 107.9 +14+ 3x 16 = 170 g/mol
= 6.3g/(170 g/ mol) =0.037 mol
Now apply the formula for concentration
�=�/�
=0.037 mol/0.5 dm
3
=0.07 mol /dm
3
=0.07M
Concentration:
The concentration of a solution is the amount of solute present in a given quantity of solvent or
solution.
A solution is a homogenous mixture of 2 or more substances (Solvent + Solute).
A solute is the substance that dissolved into a solvent and it presents in the smaller amount.
A solvent is the substance that dissolved the solute substance and it presents in the larger
amount.
E.g. Solvent (N2) + Solute (O2 , Ar , CO2) → Solution (Air(g))
Solvent (H2O) + Solute (CO2 , Sugar) → Solution (Soft drink(l))
Types of Solutions:
Component 1 Component 2 State of Resulting Solution Examples
Gas Gas Gas Air
Gas Liquid Liquid Soda water (CO2 in water )
Gas Solid Solid H2 gas in palladium
Liquid Liquid Liquid Ethanol in water
Solid Liquid Liquid NaCl (salt) in water
Solid Solid Solid Brass (Cu/Zn), Solder (Sn/Pb)
Methods express the concentration:
1) Molarity:
a) It is the number of moles of solutes dissolved in one liter of solution.
b) Symbol used for molarity is M.
c) Molarity (M) =
�� �� ����� �� ������� (���)
������ �� �������� (��
3
)
=
���� �� ������
������ �� ��������
=
�
�
���/��
3
E.g.1 What is the concentration of a solution which is made by dissolving 0.5 mole
of NaOH in 200cm
3
of solution?
No of moles of NaOH n =0.5 mole
Volume of solution (V) = 200cm
3
1 dm
3
= 1000 cm
3
200cm
3
=
200/ 1000 = 0.2
dm
3
Now apply the formula for concentration
�=�/�
M =0.50 mole/0.20 dm
3
= 2.5M
E.g.2 Calculate the concentration of 6.3g of silver nitrate (AgNO3) in 0.05 dm
3
water.
First find the no of moles of AgNO3
�=�/���
RMM = 107.9 +14+ 3x 16 = 170 g/mol
= 6.3g/(170 g/ mol) =0.037 mol
Now apply the formula for concentration
�=�/�
=0.037 mol/0.5 dm
3
=0.07 mol /dm
3
=0.07M
93
d) Molar solution is that solution which contains 1 mole of solute dissolved in 1 dm
3
or 1 liter of solvent.
e) Dilution is making a less concentrated solution from a more concentrated solution
by Adding Solvent.
2) Molality:
a) It is the number of moles of solutes dissolved in one Kg of solvent.
b) Symbol used for molality is m
c) Molality (m) =
�� �� ����� �� ������� (���)
���� �� ������� (��)
=
�
�
���/��
E.g. calculate the molality of a solution containing 37.0g of HCl in 63g H2O.
No of moles of HCl (n)=37.0g /36.46=1.01 mol
Mass of solvent (kg) (m)= 63g/1000=0.063 kg
�=�/�(??????�)
m=1.01 mol/0.063 kg=16 mol/ kg
d) Molal solution is that solution which contains 1 mole of solute dissolved in 1 Kg of
solvent.
Solubility:
It is the property of a solute to dissolve in a given amount
of solvent to form a solution at a specified temperature.
Solubility value is different for different temperatures.
The solubility of a substance depends on the solvent,
temperature and pressure.
Types of solutions:
1) Saturated: The solvent is holding maximum amount
of solute as it can at a given temperature.
2) Unsaturated: The solution is holding less than
maximum amount of solute at a certain temperature
3) Supersaturated: The solution is holding more than
maximum amount of solute a certain temperature.
Effect of Temperature on solubility:
a) Usually solubility of solid increases with increase in temperature.
b) Solubility of the gases decreases with increase in temperature.
d) Molar solution is that solution which contains 1 mole of solute dissolved in 1 dm
3
or 1 liter of solvent.
e) Dilution is making a less concentrated solution from a more concentrated solution
by Adding Solvent.
2) Molality:
a) It is the number of moles of solutes dissolved in one Kg of solvent.
b) Symbol used for molality is m
c) Molality (m) =
�� �� ����� �� ������� (���)
���� �� ������� (��)
=
�
�
���/��
E.g. calculate the molality of a solution containing 37.0g of HCl in 63g H2O.
No of moles of HCl (n)=37.0g /36.46=1.01 mol
Mass of solvent (kg) (m)= 63g/1000=0.063 kg
�=�/�(??????�)
m=1.01 mol/0.063 kg=16 mol/ kg
d) Molal solution is that solution which contains 1 mole of solute dissolved in 1 Kg of
solvent.
Solubility:
It is the property of a solute to dissolve in a given amount
of solvent to form a solution at a specified temperature.
Solubility value is different for different temperatures.
The solubility of a substance depends on the solvent,
temperature and pressure.
Types of solutions:
1) Saturated: The solvent is holding maximum amount
of solute as it can at a given temperature.
2) Unsaturated: The solution is holding less than
maximum amount of solute at a certain temperature
3) Supersaturated: The solution is holding more than
maximum amount of solute a certain temperature.
Effect of Temperature on solubility:
a) Usually solubility of solid increases with increase in temperature.
b) Solubility of the gases decreases with increase in temperature.
94
95
8.1 Formulas
1. radians = ���°
2. Radian–Degree Conversion Formulas:
a) Basic proportion:
??????
��??????
180°
=
??????
���
� ���
b) Radians to degrees: �
���=
180°
� ���
�
��� , Degrees to radians: �
���=
� ���
180°
�
���
3. 60' (minutes) = �° (degree)
4. 60" (seconds) = 1' (minute)
5. 1' (minute) = (
�
��
)
°
6. 1'' (second) = (
�
����
)
°
=(
�
����
)
°
7. Trigonometric functions: �??????��,����,����,������,����,��� ����
8. Inverse trigonometric functions: �??????�
−1
�,���
−1
�,���
−1
�,�����
−1
�,���
−1
�,��� ���
−1
�
9. Trigonometric functions of complementary angles (��°−�) �� (
�
�
−�)
sin(90°−�)=cos�
cos(90°−�)=sin�
tan(90°−�)=cot�
cosec(90°−�)=sec�
sec(90°−�)=cosec�
cot(90°−�)=tan�
10. Trigonometric functions of negative angles:
11. Trigonometric Table of some special angles :
�
Tri fn
(0 rad), �° (
�
�
rad), ��° (
�
�
rad), ��° (
�
�
rad), ��° (
�
�
rad), ��°
�??????�� 0
1
2
1
√2
√3
2
1
���� 1 √3
2
1
√2
1
2
0
���� 0
1
√3
1 √3 ∞
12. Note: �����°=�,����� �°=∞,�����°=∞,����°=∞
13. Trigonometric Basic Identities:
sin(−�)=−sin�
cos(−�)=cos�
tan(−�)=−tan�
cosec(−�)=−cosec�
sec(−�)=sec�
cot(−�)=−cot�
�??????�
2
�+���
2
�=1
1−�??????�
2
�=���
2
�
1−���
2
�=�??????�
2
�
1−��� 2�=2 �??????�
2
�
1+��� 2�=2 ���
2
�
1+���
2
�=���
2
�
���
2
�−1=���
2
�
���
2
�−���
2
�=1
1+���
2
�=�����
2
�
�����
2
�−1=���
2
�
�����
2
�−���
2
�=1
8.1 Formulas
1. radians = ���°
2. Radian–Degree Conversion Formulas:
a) Basic proportion:
??????
��??????
180°
=
??????
���
� ���
b) Radians to degrees: �
���=
180°
� ���
�
��� , Degrees to radians: �
���=
� ���
180°
�
���
3. 60' (minutes) = �° (degree)
4. 60" (seconds) = 1' (minute)
5. 1' (minute) = (
�
��
)
°
6. 1'' (second) = (
�
����
)
°
=(
�
����
)
°
7. Trigonometric functions: �??????��,����,����,������,����,��� ����
8. Inverse trigonometric functions: �??????�
−1
�,���
−1
�,���
−1
�,�����
−1
�,���
−1
�,��� ���
−1
�
9. Trigonometric functions of complementary angles (��°−�) �� (
�
�
−�)
sin(90°−�)=cos�
cos(90°−�)=sin�
tan(90°−�)=cot�
cosec(90°−�)=sec�
sec(90°−�)=cosec�
cot(90°−�)=tan�
10. Trigonometric functions of negative angles:
11. Trigonometric Table of some special angles :
�
Tri fn
(0 rad), �° (
�
�
rad), ��° (
�
�
rad), ��° (
�
�
rad), ��° (
�
�
rad), ��°
�??????�� 0
1
2
1
√2
√3
2
1
���� 1 √3
2
1
√2
1
2
0
���� 0
1
√3
1 √3 ∞
12. Note: �����°=�,����� �°=∞,�����°=∞,����°=∞
13. Trigonometric Basic Identities:
sin(−�)=−sin�
cos(−�)=cos�
tan(−�)=−tan�
cosec(−�)=−cosec�
sec(−�)=sec�
cot(−�)=−cot�
�??????�
2
�+���
2
�=1
1−�??????�
2
�=���
2
�
1−���
2
�=�??????�
2
�
1−��� 2�=2 �??????�
2
�
1+��� 2�=2 ���
2
�
1+���
2
�=���
2
�
���
2
�−1=���
2
�
���
2
�−���
2
�=1
1+���
2
�=�����
2
�
�����
2
�−1=���
2
�
�����
2
�−���
2
�=1
96
14. Special Note!
tan�=
sin�
cos�
cot�=
cos�
sin�
=
1
��� �
cosec�=
1
sin�
sec�=
1
cos�
15. Trigonometric Sum/Difference Identities:
sin(�+�)=sin�cos�+cos�sin�
sin(�−�)=sin�cos�−cos�sin�
cos(�+�)=cos�cos�−sin�sin�
cos(�−�)=cos�cos�+sin�sin�
tan(�+�)=
��� �+��� �
1−��� � ��� �
tan(�−�)=
��� �−��� �
1+��� � ��� �
16. Double angle Identities:
�??????�2�=2�??????������
���2�=���
2
�−�??????�
2
�
���2�=2���
2
�−1
���2�=1−2�??????�
2
�
1−���2�=�??????�
2
�
1+���2�=2���
2
�
tan2�=
2��� �
1−���
2
�
17. Triple angle Identities:
sin3�=3sin�−4 �??????�
3
�
cos3�=4 ���
3
�−3 ��� �
18. Sum to product identities:
sin�+sin�=2sin
�+�
2
cos
�−�
2
sin�−sin�=2cos
�+�
2
cos
�−�
2
cos�+cos�=2cos
�+�
2
cos
�−�
2
cos�+cos�=−2sin
�+�
2
sin
�−�
2
19. Product to Sum identities:
2sin�cos�=sin(�+�)+sin(�−�)
2cos�sin�=sin(�+�)−sin(�−�)
2cos�cos�=cos(�+�)+cos(�−�)
2sin�sin�=cos(�−�)−cos(�+�)
14. Special Note!
tan�=
sin�
cos�
cot�=
cos�
sin�
=
1
��� �
cosec�=
1
sin�
sec�=
1
cos�
15. Trigonometric Sum/Difference Identities:
sin(�+�)=sin�cos�+cos�sin�
sin(�−�)=sin�cos�−cos�sin�
cos(�+�)=cos�cos�−sin�sin�
cos(�−�)=cos�cos�+sin�sin�
tan(�+�)=
��� �+��� �
1−��� � ��� �
tan(�−�)=
��� �−��� �
1+��� � ��� �
16. Double angle Identities:
�??????�2�=2�??????������
���2�=���
2
�−�??????�
2
�
���2�=2���
2
�−1
���2�=1−2�??????�
2
�
1−���2�=�??????�
2
�
1+���2�=2���
2
�
tan2�=
2��� �
1−���
2
�
17. Triple angle Identities:
sin3�=3sin�−4 �??????�
3
�
cos3�=4 ���
3
�−3 ��� �
18. Sum to product identities:
sin�+sin�=2sin
�+�
2
cos
�−�
2
sin�−sin�=2cos
�+�
2
cos
�−�
2
cos�+cos�=2cos
�+�
2
cos
�−�
2
cos�+cos�=−2sin
�+�
2
sin
�−�
2
19. Product to Sum identities:
2sin�cos�=sin(�+�)+sin(�−�)
2cos�sin�=sin(�+�)−sin(�−�)
2cos�cos�=cos(�+�)+cos(�−�)
2sin�sin�=cos(�−�)−cos(�+�)
97
20. Algebraic Identities:
a) (�+�)
2
=�
2
+2��+�
2
b) (�−�)
2
=�
2
−2��+�
2
c) (�+�)(�−�)=�
2
−�
2
d) (�−�)
3
=�
3
−3�
2
�+3��
2
−�
3
e) (�+�)
3
=�
3
+3�
2
�+3��
2
+�
3
f) (�+�)(�
2
−��+�
2
)=�
3
+�
3
g) (�−�)(�
2
+��+�
2
)=�
3
−�
3
21. Indices formulas:
a) �
�
�
�
=�
�+�
b)
�
�
�
�
=�
�−�
c) (�
�
)
�
=�
��
d) �
�
�=√�
�
�
, The symbol √ is called a radical, n is called the index, and a is called the radicand
e) �
−�
=
1
�
�
f) �
0
=1
22. Logarithmic rules:
a) log
��+log
��=log
���
b) log
��−log
��=log
�
�
�
c) log
��
�
=�×log
��
d) log1=0
e) log
��=1
f) log�=log
10�
g) ln�=1
h) ln�=log
��
23. Exponential form of hyperbolic functions:
a) ���ℎ(��)=
�
��
+�
−��
2
b) �??????�ℎ(��)=
�
��
−�
−��
2
24. Exponential form of trigonometric functions:
a) ���(��)=
�
���
+�
−���
2
b) �??????�(��)=
�
���
−�
−���
2�
25. Limits:
a) lim
�→0
��� �
�
=1
b) lim
�→0
�
�
−1
�
=ln�
c) lim
�→0
�
�
−1
�
=1
d) lim
�→�
�
�
−�
�
�−�
=� �
�−1
20. Algebraic Identities:
a) (�+�)
2
=�
2
+2��+�
2
b) (�−�)
2
=�
2
−2��+�
2
c) (�+�)(�−�)=�
2
−�
2
d) (�−�)
3
=�
3
−3�
2
�+3��
2
−�
3
e) (�+�)
3
=�
3
+3�
2
�+3��
2
+�
3
f) (�+�)(�
2
−��+�
2
)=�
3
+�
3
g) (�−�)(�
2
+��+�
2
)=�
3
−�
3
21. Indices formulas:
a) �
�
�
�
=�
�+�
b)
�
�
�
�
=�
�−�
c) (�
�
)
�
=�
��
d) �
�
�=√�
�
�
, The symbol √ is called a radical, n is called the index, and a is called the radicand
e) �
−�
=
1
�
�
f) �
0
=1
22. Logarithmic rules:
a) log
��+log
��=log
���
b) log
��−log
��=log
�
�
�
c) log
��
�
=�×log
��
d) log1=0
e) log
��=1
f) log�=log
10�
g) ln�=1
h) ln�=log
��
23. Exponential form of hyperbolic functions:
a) ���ℎ(��)=
�
��
+�
−��
2
b) �??????�ℎ(��)=
�
��
−�
−��
2
24. Exponential form of trigonometric functions:
a) ���(��)=
�
���
+�
−���
2
b) �??????�(��)=
�
���
−�
−���
2�
25. Limits:
a) lim
�→0
��� �
�
=1
b) lim
�→0
�
�
−1
�
=ln�
c) lim
�→0
�
�
−1
�
=1
d) lim
�→�
�
�
−�
�
�−�
=� �
�−1
98
26. Partial Fraction Rules:
a)
� ± �
�
=
�
�
±
�
�
, �≠0
b)
� − �
(�+�) (�+�)
=
1
�+�
−
1
�+�
, �+�≠0, �+�≠0
c)
� − �
(�−�) (�−�)
=
1
�−�
−
1
�−�
, �−�≠0, �−�≠0
d)
� ± �
��
=
1
�
±
1
�
, �≠0, �≠0
27. Quadratic Formula:
If ��
�
+��+�=�,�≠� (Quadratic Equation) then: �=
−�±√�
�
−���
��
28. Equations of some important curves:
a) Equation of the circle with center (�,�) and radius � is (�−�)
�
+(�−�)
�
=�
�
b) Equation of the circle with center origin and radius � is �
�
+�
�
=�
�
c) Equation of ellipse is
�
�
�
�
+
�
�
�
�
=�, where � and � are constants.
d) Equation of a parabola is �=��
�
+��+�, where � and � and � are constants.
e) Equation of the hyper bola is
�
�
�
�
−
�
�
�
�
=�, where � and � are constants.
29. Pythagoras' theorem
The square of the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the squares
of the other two sides. pythagoras' equation: �
2
=�
2
+�
2
30. Right triangle definition
sinθ=
opposite
hypotenuse
cscθ=
hypotenuse
opposite
=
1
sin�
0°< �<90°
cosθ=
adjacent
hypotenuse
secθ=
hypotenuse
adjacent
=
1
cos�
tanθ=
opposite
adjacent
cotθ=
adjacent
opposite
=
1
tan�
31. Unit circle definition
sinθ=
y
1
=y cscθ=
1
y
cosθ=
x
1
=� secθ=
1
x
tanθ=
y
x
cotθ=
x
y
Angles and Their Measure:
Angles: It is formed by rotating initial side of the angle around terminal side of the angle.
A counterclockwise rotation produces a positive angle, and a clockwise rotation produces a
negative angle.
Angle θ or angle PVQ or < V
26. Partial Fraction Rules:
a)
� ± �
�
=
�
�
±
�
�
, �≠0
b)
� − �
(�+�) (�+�)
=
1
�+�
−
1
�+�
, �+�≠0, �+�≠0
c)
� − �
(�−�) (�−�)
=
1
�−�
−
1
�−�
, �−�≠0, �−�≠0
d)
� ± �
��
=
1
�
±
1
�
, �≠0, �≠0
27. Quadratic Formula:
If ��
�
+��+�=�,�≠� (Quadratic Equation) then: �=
−�±√�
�
−���
��
28. Equations of some important curves:
a) Equation of the circle with center (�,�) and radius � is (�−�)
�
+(�−�)
�
=�
�
b) Equation of the circle with center origin and radius � is �
�
+�
�
=�
�
c) Equation of ellipse is
�
�
�
�
+
�
�
�
�
=�, where � and � are constants.
d) Equation of a parabola is �=��
�
+��+�, where � and � and � are constants.
e) Equation of the hyper bola is
�
�
�
�
−
�
�
�
�
=�, where � and � are constants.
29. Pythagoras' theorem
The square of the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the squares
of the other two sides. pythagoras' equation: �
2
=�
2
+�
2
30. Right triangle definition
sinθ=
opposite
hypotenuse
cscθ=
hypotenuse
opposite
=
1
sin�
0°< �<90°
cosθ=
adjacent
hypotenuse
secθ=
hypotenuse
adjacent
=
1
cos�
tanθ=
opposite
adjacent
cotθ=
adjacent
opposite
=
1
tan�
31. Unit circle definition
sinθ=
y
1
=y cscθ=
1
y
cosθ=
x
1
=� secθ=
1
x
tanθ=
y
x
cotθ=
x
y
Angles and Their Measure:
Angles: It is formed by rotating initial side of the angle around terminal side of the angle.
A counterclockwise rotation produces a positive angle, and a clockwise rotation produces a
negative angle.
Angle θ or angle PVQ or < V
99
Angles and rotation:
Angles in standard positions:
Types of angles
Degree Measure: The two most commonly used units for angle measure are degree & radian.
a. Angle formed by one complete rotation is said to have a measure of 360 degrees (360°).
b. Angle formed by
1
360
of a complete rotation is said to have a measure of 1 degree (1°).
c. Degree measure is used in engineering, surveying & navigation.
d. Convert from Decimal degrees (DD) to degrees- minutes-seconds (DMS) and vice versa:
i. E.g.1 Convert 21°47'12'' to DD form.
Solution: 21°47
′
12
′′
=(21+
47
60
+
12
3600
)=21.787°
ii. E.g.2 Convert 105.183° to DMS form.
Solution: 105.183°= 105°(0.183×60)' = 105°10.98' = 105°10' (0.98×60)" =105°10'59"
Radian Measure:
a. Length of arc s of a circle: �=�??????
Where, r, radius of the circle, θ, The
angle subtended by arc, and it
should be measured in radians.
b. If �=�, then �=
�
�
⁄=1 ���??????��
c. Radian measure is used in mathematical developments, scientific work & engineering
applications.
d. Engineering: A belt connects a pulley of 2-inch radius with a pulley of 5-inch radius. If the
larger pulley turns through 10 radians, through how many radians will the smaller pulley
turn?
Solution: For the larger pulley: s = r θ = (5)(10) = 50 inches
For the smaller pulley: �=
�
�
=
50
2
=25 ���??????���
Angles and rotation:
Angles in standard positions:
Types of angles
Degree Measure: The two most commonly used units for angle measure are degree & radian.
a. Angle formed by one complete rotation is said to have a measure of 360 degrees (360°).
b. Angle formed by
1
360
of a complete rotation is said to have a measure of 1 degree (1°).
c. Degree measure is used in engineering, surveying & navigation.
d. Convert from Decimal degrees (DD) to degrees- minutes-seconds (DMS) and vice versa:
i. E.g.1 Convert 21°47'12'' to DD form.
Solution: 21°47
′
12
′′
=(21+
47
60
+
12
3600
)=21.787°
ii. E.g.2 Convert 105.183° to DMS form.
Solution: 105.183°= 105°(0.183×60)' = 105°10.98' = 105°10' (0.98×60)" =105°10'59"
Radian Measure:
a. Length of arc s of a circle: �=�??????
Where, r, radius of the circle, θ, The
angle subtended by arc, and it
should be measured in radians.
b. If �=�, then �=
�
�
⁄=1 ���??????��
c. Radian measure is used in mathematical developments, scientific work & engineering
applications.
d. Engineering: A belt connects a pulley of 2-inch radius with a pulley of 5-inch radius. If the
larger pulley turns through 10 radians, through how many radians will the smaller pulley
turn?
Solution: For the larger pulley: s = r θ = (5)(10) = 50 inches
For the smaller pulley: �=
�
�
=
50
2
=25 ���??????���
100
Algebra & Real Numbers:
Sets:
a) They are a collection of objects with the important property.
b) Each object in a set is called an element or member of the set.
c) �∈� means "a is an element of set A” E.g. �∈{�,�,�}
d) �∉� means "a is not an element of set A” E.g. �∉{�,�,�}
e) A set is finite if the number of elements in the set can be counted and infinite if
there is no end in counting its elements.
f) A set is empty or null set if it contains no elements, and is denoted by ∅
g) If each element of set A is also an element of set B, we say that A is a subset of set
B, and we write �⊂� e.g. {�,�}⊂{�,�,�}
h) Since the empty set ∅ has no elements, every element of ∅ is also an element of
any given set. Thus, the empty set is a subset of every set. E.g. ∅⊂{�,�,�}
i) If two sets A and B have exactly the same elements, the sets are said to be equal,
and we write �=� {�,�,�}={�,�,�}
j) Union: �∪� : The combining all the elements of A and B. E.g {1,2} ∪ {2,3}={1,2,3}
k) Intersection: �∩� :The set of elements of A that are also in B. E.g {1,2} ∩ {2,3}={2}
The set of Real Numbers:
a) It is any number that has a decimal representation.
b) Real numbers and important subsets:
c) The Set of Real Numbers:
Symbol Name Description Examples
N Natural
numbers
Counting numbers (also called positive
integers)
1, 2, 3, …
Z Integers Natural numbers, their negatives and 0 … , -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, …
Q
Rational
numbers
Numbers that can be represented as
a/b. where a and b are integers and
b≠0; decimal representations are
repeating or terminating
-4, 0, 1, 25,
−3
5
,
2
3
,
3.67, -0.333,5.2727
I
Irrational
numbers
Numbers that can be represented as
nonrepeating and nonterminating
decimal numbers
√2, �, √7
3
, 1.4142..
2.718…
R Real
numbers
Rational numbers and irrational
numbers
Natural number exponents:
a) For n a natural number and a any real number:
�
�
=��ׅ.� ,� ������� �� � , E.g. 2
4
=2×2×2×2 4 ������� �� 2
Polynomials:
a) They are involving only the operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication, and
rising to natural number powers on variables and constants.
b) Examples of Polynomials and Nonpolynomials:
Algebra & Real Numbers:
Sets:
a) They are a collection of objects with the important property.
b) Each object in a set is called an element or member of the set.
c) �∈� means "a is an element of set A” E.g. �∈{�,�,�}
d) �∉� means "a is not an element of set A” E.g. �∉{�,�,�}
e) A set is finite if the number of elements in the set can be counted and infinite if
there is no end in counting its elements.
f) A set is empty or null set if it contains no elements, and is denoted by ∅
g) If each element of set A is also an element of set B, we say that A is a subset of set
B, and we write �⊂� e.g. {�,�}⊂{�,�,�}
h) Since the empty set ∅ has no elements, every element of ∅ is also an element of
any given set. Thus, the empty set is a subset of every set. E.g. ∅⊂{�,�,�}
i) If two sets A and B have exactly the same elements, the sets are said to be equal,
and we write �=� {�,�,�}={�,�,�}
j) Union: �∪� : The combining all the elements of A and B. E.g {1,2} ∪ {2,3}={1,2,3}
k) Intersection: �∩� :The set of elements of A that are also in B. E.g {1,2} ∩ {2,3}={2}
The set of Real Numbers:
a) It is any number that has a decimal representation.
b) Real numbers and important subsets:
c) The Set of Real Numbers:
Symbol Name Description Examples
N Natural
numbers
Counting numbers (also called positive
integers)
1, 2, 3, …
Z Integers Natural numbers, their negatives and 0 … , -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, …
Q
Rational
numbers
Numbers that can be represented as
a/b. where a and b are integers and
b≠0; decimal representations are
repeating or terminating
-4, 0, 1, 25,
−3
5
,
2
3
,
3.67, -0.333,5.2727
I
Irrational
numbers
Numbers that can be represented as
nonrepeating and nonterminating
decimal numbers
√2, �, √7
3
, 1.4142..
2.718…
R Real
numbers
Rational numbers and irrational
numbers
Natural number exponents:
a) For n a natural number and a any real number:
�
�
=��ׅ.� ,� ������� �� � , E.g. 2
4
=2×2×2×2 4 ������� �� 2
Polynomials:
a) They are involving only the operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication, and
rising to natural number powers on variables and constants.
b) Examples of Polynomials and Nonpolynomials:
101
1) Polynomials in one variable: �
2
−3�+2 ,6�
3
−√2�−
1
3
2) Polynomials in several variables: 3�
2
−2��+�
2
,4�
3
�
2
−√3��
2
�
5
3) Nonpolynomials: √2�−
3
�
+5 ,
�
2
−3�+2
�−3
,√�
2
−3�+1
c) classifying polynomials by degree:
1) Single-term polynomial called a Monomial: E.g.
5
2
�
2
�
3
2) Two-term polynomial called a Binomial: E.g. �
3
+4.7
3) Three-term polynomial called a Trinomial: E.g. �
4
−√2�
2
+9
d) Polynomials: Factoring:
1) A factor of a number is one of two or more numbers whose product is the
given number.
2) E.g. 30=2×3×5 2, 3, and 5 are each factors of 30.
�
2
−4=(�−2)(�−2) ,(�−2) & (�−2)are each factors of �
2
−4
Long division
The number to be divided into is known as the dividend
The number which divides the other number is known as
the divisor
Steps Long division Calculations Explanations
Step 1 4 ÷ 25 ≈ 0 The first digit of the dividend (4) is divided by the divisor.
Any remainders are ignored.
Step 2 25 × 0 = 0
The result number is placed at top and it multiplied by the
divisor.The result is placed under the number divided into
Step 3
4 – 0 = 4 Now we subtract the bottom number from the top
number.
Step 4
42 ÷ 25 ≈1
Bring down the next digit of the dividend and Divide this
number by the divisor. The result number is placed at the
top. Any remainders are ignored.
Step 5
25 × 1 = 25
The answer from the above operation is multiplied by the
divisor. The result is placed under the last number divided
into.
Step 6
42 – 25 = 17
Now we subtract the bottom number from the top
number.
Step 7
175 ÷ 25 = 7
Bring down the next digit of the dividend and Divide this
number by the divisor. The result number is placed at the
top. Any remainders are ignored.
Step 8
25 × 7 = 175
The answer from the above operation is multiplied by the
divisor. The result is placed under the number divided
into.
Step 9
175 – 175 = 0
Now we subtract the bottom number from the top
number.
Step
10
There are no more digits to bring down. The answer must
be 17.
1) Polynomials in one variable: �
2
−3�+2 ,6�
3
−√2�−
1
3
2) Polynomials in several variables: 3�
2
−2��+�
2
,4�
3
�
2
−√3��
2
�
5
3) Nonpolynomials: √2�−
3
�
+5 ,
�
2
−3�+2
�−3
,√�
2
−3�+1
c) classifying polynomials by degree:
1) Single-term polynomial called a Monomial: E.g.
5
2
�
2
�
3
2) Two-term polynomial called a Binomial: E.g. �
3
+4.7
3) Three-term polynomial called a Trinomial: E.g. �
4
−√2�
2
+9
d) Polynomials: Factoring:
1) A factor of a number is one of two or more numbers whose product is the
given number.
2) E.g. 30=2×3×5 2, 3, and 5 are each factors of 30.
�
2
−4=(�−2)(�−2) ,(�−2) & (�−2)are each factors of �
2
−4
Long division
The number to be divided into is known as the dividend
The number which divides the other number is known as
the divisor
Steps Long division Calculations Explanations
Step 1 4 ÷ 25 ≈ 0 The first digit of the dividend (4) is divided by the divisor.
Any remainders are ignored.
Step 2 25 × 0 = 0
The result number is placed at top and it multiplied by the
divisor.The result is placed under the number divided into
Step 3
4 – 0 = 4 Now we subtract the bottom number from the top
number.
Step 4
42 ÷ 25 ≈1
Bring down the next digit of the dividend and Divide this
number by the divisor. The result number is placed at the
top. Any remainders are ignored.
Step 5
25 × 1 = 25
The answer from the above operation is multiplied by the
divisor. The result is placed under the last number divided
into.
Step 6
42 – 25 = 17
Now we subtract the bottom number from the top
number.
Step 7
175 ÷ 25 = 7
Bring down the next digit of the dividend and Divide this
number by the divisor. The result number is placed at the
top. Any remainders are ignored.
Step 8
25 × 7 = 175
The answer from the above operation is multiplied by the
divisor. The result is placed under the number divided
into.
Step 9
175 – 175 = 0
Now we subtract the bottom number from the top
number.
Step
10
There are no more digits to bring down. The answer must
be 17.
102
Converting of Decimals and Fractions
1. Convert Fractions to Decimals by using long division
The form a/b is called a fraction
The number to be divided into is known as the numerator.
The number which divides the other number is known as the denominator.
Steps Long division Calculations Explanations
Step 1 35
We convert fraction into long division form.
Step 2 .
035.
Add the decimal point after numerator and put the
decimal point in the answer. Then add zero after
the numerator decimal point.
Step 3 6.
035.
30 ÷ 5 = 6
The answer from the above operation is divided
into the denominator. The result number is placed
at the top. Any remainders are ignored.
Step 4 6.
30
035.
6 × 5 = 30
Now we multiple the top number into the
denominator. The result number is placed under
the numerator.
Step 5 6.
0
30
0.3
5
30 - 30 = 0
Now we subtract the bottom number from the top
number.
Step 6
Answer = 0.6
There are no more digits to bring down. The
answer must be 0.6. If There are more digits to
bring down, add another zero after the numerator
decimal point until become no digits at the down.
2. Convert Decimals to Fractions by using long division
If there is one number after the decimal point, then use 10, if there are two then
use 100, if there are three then use 1000, etc.
Steps Calculations Explanations
Step 1 0.75
1
Write down 0.75 divided by 1
Step 2 0.75×100
1×100
=
75
100
Multiply both top and bottom by 100, because there are 2 digits
after the decimal point.
Step 3 75÷5
100÷5
=
15
20
Simplify the fraction by divide both top and bottom by 5
Step 4 15÷5
20÷5
=
3
4
The answer from the above operation is divided into 5
Step 5 Answer =
3
4
We cannot simplify the fraction more, so the answer must be
�
�
.
Mensuration Formula
Shape/Solid Perimeter Area Volume Details
Rectangle/Cuboid �=2×(�+�) �=�×� �=��ℎ Length (�),Breath(�),Height (ℎ)
Square/Cube �=4� �=�
2
�=�
3
Length (�)
Triangle/Pyramid �=�+�+� �=
1
2
×�×ℎ �=
1
3
��ℎ Length (�), Base (�),Height (ℎ),
Width (�)
Circle/Sphere �=2�� �=��
2
/
�=4��
2
�=
4
3
��
3
Radius (�)
Cylinder �=(��+2ℎ) �=2��ℎ �=��
2
ℎ Radius (�), Height (ℎ)
Converting of Decimals and Fractions
1. Convert Fractions to Decimals by using long division
The form a/b is called a fraction
The number to be divided into is known as the numerator.
The number which divides the other number is known as the denominator.
Steps Long division Calculations Explanations
Step 1 35
We convert fraction into long division form.
Step 2 .
035.
Add the decimal point after numerator and put the
decimal point in the answer. Then add zero after
the numerator decimal point.
Step 3 6.
035.
30 ÷ 5 = 6
The answer from the above operation is divided
into the denominator. The result number is placed
at the top. Any remainders are ignored.
Step 4 6.
30
035.
6 × 5 = 30
Now we multiple the top number into the
denominator. The result number is placed under
the numerator.
Step 5 6.
0
30
0.3
5
30 - 30 = 0
Now we subtract the bottom number from the top
number.
Step 6
Answer = 0.6
There are no more digits to bring down. The
answer must be 0.6. If There are more digits to
bring down, add another zero after the numerator
decimal point until become no digits at the down.
2. Convert Decimals to Fractions by using long division
If there is one number after the decimal point, then use 10, if there are two then
use 100, if there are three then use 1000, etc.
Steps Calculations Explanations
Step 1 0.75
1
Write down 0.75 divided by 1
Step 2 0.75×100
1×100
=
75
100
Multiply both top and bottom by 100, because there are 2 digits
after the decimal point.
Step 3 75÷5
100÷5
=
15
20
Simplify the fraction by divide both top and bottom by 5
Step 4 15÷5
20÷5
=
3
4
The answer from the above operation is divided into 5
Step 5 Answer =
3
4
We cannot simplify the fraction more, so the answer must be
�
�
.
Mensuration Formula
Shape/Solid Perimeter Area Volume Details
Rectangle/Cuboid �=2×(�+�) �=�×� �=��ℎ Length (�),Breath(�),Height (ℎ)
Square/Cube �=4� �=�
2
�=�
3
Length (�)
Triangle/Pyramid �=�+�+� �=
1
2
×�×ℎ �=
1
3
��ℎ Length (�), Base (�),Height (ℎ),
Width (�)
Circle/Sphere �=2�� �=��
2
/
�=4��
2
�=
4
3
��
3
Radius (�)
Cylinder �=(��+2ℎ) �=2��ℎ �=��
2
ℎ Radius (�), Height (ℎ)
103
Interval Notation
Integration
Rules of Integration
1. ∫� �(�)��=�∫�(�)��
2. ∫[�(�)±g(�)]��=∫�(�)��±∫g(�)��
3. If ∫�(�)��=�(�)+�, then ∫�(�)��=�(�)−�(�)
�
�
Formulas:
No. Formula No. Formula
1
∫�
�
��=
�
�+1
�+1
+�
1+
∫(��+�)
�
��=
1
�
(��+�)
�+1
(�+1)
+�
2
∫
1
�
��=���+� 2+
∫
1
��+�
��=
1
�
ln(��+�)+�
3
∫�
�
��=�
�
+� 3+
∫�
��+�
��=
1
�
�
��+�
+�
4
∫�
�
��=
�
�
�� �
+�
4+
∫�
��+�
��=
1
�
�
��+�
�� �
+�
5
∫�??????�� ��=−����+� 5+
∫sin (��+�) ��=−
1
�
cos(��+�)+�
6
∫���� ��=�??????��+� 6+
∫cos (��+�) ��=
1
�
sin(��+�)+�
7
∫���
2
� ��=����+� 7+
∫���
2
(��+�)��=
1
�
tan(��+�)+�
8
∫�����
2
� ��=−����+� 8+
∫�����
2
(��+�)��=−
1
�
cot(��+�)+�
9
∫���� ��=ln(����)+� 10 ∫���� ��=ln(�??????��)+�
11
∫� ��=��+� (� ��������) 12 ∫��=�+�
13
∫
1
√�
��=2√�+� 13+
∫
1
√�
2
��=−
1
�
+�
�′(�)
�(�)
��=���(�)+�
∫�(�) ��
�
�
is the area of the region bounded by the curve �=�(�), the ordinates �=� and
�=�, and the �−����
Interval Notation
Integration
Rules of Integration
1. ∫� �(�)��=�∫�(�)��
2. ∫[�(�)±g(�)]��=∫�(�)��±∫g(�)��
3. If ∫�(�)��=�(�)+�, then ∫�(�)��=�(�)−�(�)
�
�
Formulas:
No. Formula No. Formula
1
∫�
�
��=
�
�+1
�+1
+�
1+
∫(��+�)
�
��=
1
�
(��+�)
�+1
(�+1)
+�
2
∫
1
�
��=���+� 2+
∫
1
��+�
��=
1
�
ln(��+�)+�
3
∫�
�
��=�
�
+� 3+
∫�
��+�
��=
1
�
�
��+�
+�
4
∫�
�
��=
�
�
�� �
+�
4+
∫�
��+�
��=
1
�
�
��+�
�� �
+�
5
∫�??????�� ��=−����+� 5+
∫sin (��+�) ��=−
1
�
cos(��+�)+�
6
∫���� ��=�??????��+� 6+
∫cos (��+�) ��=
1
�
sin(��+�)+�
7
∫���
2
� ��=����+� 7+
∫���
2
(��+�)��=
1
�
tan(��+�)+�
8
∫�����
2
� ��=−����+� 8+
∫�����
2
(��+�)��=−
1
�
cot(��+�)+�
9
∫���� ��=ln(����)+� 10 ∫���� ��=ln(�??????��)+�
11
∫� ��=��+� (� ��������) 12 ∫��=�+�
13
∫
1
√�
��=2√�+� 13+
∫
1
√�
2
��=−
1
�
+�
�′(�)
�(�)
��=���(�)+�
∫�(�) ��
�
�
is the area of the region bounded by the curve �=�(�), the ordinates �=� and
�=�, and the �−����
104
Differentiation
Rules of Differentiation: In the following statements, k is a constant and u, v are functions x
1. If �=�� , then
��
��
=��
′
Constant - Function Rule
2. If �=� ±� , then
��
��
=�
′
±�′ Sum rule
3. If �=�� , then
��
��
=� �′+� �′ Product rule
4. If �=
�
�
, �≠0 , then
��
��
=
��
′
−��
′
�
2
Quotient rule
5. If �=�[�(�)] , then
��
��
=�
′
[�(�)] g′(�) Chain rule
Formulae
SN Function
�(�)
Derivative
�′(�)
SN Function
�(�)
Derivative
�′(�)
1 �
�
��
�−1
1+ (��+�)
�
��(��+�)
�−1
2 �
�
�
�
2+ �
��+�
��
��+�
3 �
�
(a constant) �
�
ln� 3+ �
��+�
��
��+�
ln�
4 �??????�� ���� 4+ sin (��+�) a cos (��+�)
5 ���� −�??????�� 5+ cos (��+�) −a sin (��+�)
6 ���� ���
2
� 6+ tan (��+�) a ���
2
(��+�)
7 ���� −�����
2
� 7+ cot (��+�) −a �����
2
(��+�)
8 ��� 1
�
8+ ln(��+�) �
1
��+�
9 ��g
�� 1
�ln�
10 � (k constant) 0
11 � 1 12 1
�
−
1
�
2
13 sec� sec�tan� 14 ����� � −cosec�cot�
15 √�
1
2 √�
The slope or gradient ‘m’ of a curve �=�(�) at the point (�
� ,�
�) is
��
��
|
(�
1 ,�1
Equation of the tangent to the curve �=�(�) at the point (�
� ,�
�) is �−�
�=�(�−�
�)
Equation of the tangent to the curve �=�(�) at the point (�
� ,�
�) is �−�
�=−
�
�
(�−�
�)
Differentiation
Rules of Differentiation: In the following statements, k is a constant and u, v are functions x
1. If �=�� , then
��
��
=��
′
Constant - Function Rule
2. If �=� ±� , then
��
��
=�
′
±�′ Sum rule
3. If �=�� , then
��
��
=� �′+� �′ Product rule
4. If �=
�
�
, �≠0 , then
��
��
=
��
′
−��
′
�
2
Quotient rule
5. If �=�[�(�)] , then
��
��
=�
′
[�(�)] g′(�) Chain rule
Formulae
SN Function
�(�)
Derivative
�′(�)
SN Function
�(�)
Derivative
�′(�)
1 �
�
��
�−1
1+ (��+�)
�
��(��+�)
�−1
2 �
�
�
�
2+ �
��+�
��
��+�
3 �
�
(a constant) �
�
ln� 3+ �
��+�
��
��+�
ln�
4 �??????�� ���� 4+ sin (��+�) a cos (��+�)
5 ���� −�??????�� 5+ cos (��+�) −a sin (��+�)
6 ���� ���
2
� 6+ tan (��+�) a ���
2
(��+�)
7 ���� −�����
2
� 7+ cot (��+�) −a �����
2
(��+�)
8 ��� 1
�
8+ ln(��+�) �
1
��+�
9 ��g
�� 1
�ln�
10 � (k constant) 0
11 � 1 12 1
�
−
1
�
2
13 sec� sec�tan� 14 ����� � −cosec�cot�
15 √�
1
2 √�
The slope or gradient ‘m’ of a curve �=�(�) at the point (�
� ,�
�) is
��
��
|
(�
1 ,�1
Equation of the tangent to the curve �=�(�) at the point (�
� ,�
�) is �−�
�=�(�−�
�)
Equation of the tangent to the curve �=�(�) at the point (�
� ,�
�) is �−�
�=−
�
�
(�−�
�)
Tags
emerson eduardo rodrigues
engineer emerson eduardo rodrigues
engenheiro emerson eduardo rodrigues
emerson eduardo rodrigues setim
emerson eduardo rodrigues 5g r
emerson rodrigues eua
engenheiro emerson eduardo rod
engenheiro emerson eduardo
hoax emerson setim
engenheiro emerson rodrigues
eng emerson eduardo rodrigues
emerson
emerson.3
management
project management
risk management
change management
customer relationship management
knowledge management
strategic management
Categories
TechnologyDownload
Download Slideshow Get the original presentation fileQuick Actions
Statistics
- Views 5,154
- Slides 107
- Favorites 3
- Age 528 days
Related Slideshows
11
8-top-ai-courses-for-customer-support-representatives-in-2025.pptx
JeroenErne2
44 views
10
7-essential-ai-courses-for-call-center-supervisors-in-2025.pptx
JeroenErne2
44 views
13
25-essential-ai-courses-for-user-support-specialists-in-2025.pptx
JeroenErne2
36 views
11
8-essential-ai-courses-for-insurance-customer-service-representatives-in-2025.pptx
JeroenErne2
33 views
21
Know for Certain
DaveSinNM
19 views
17
PPT OPD LES 3ertt4t4tqqqe23e3e3rq2qq232.pptx
novasedanayoga46
23 views